2022 Promaster: Owner'S Manual

2022 RAM PROMASTER
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
` `
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 PROMASTER

©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Second Edition
OWNER’S MANUAL
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_VF_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................................51 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 69 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................ 119 5
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 137 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 176 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 198 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 247
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 253
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 257
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS ....................................................................20 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 32

Power Door Locks ...........................................20 Multifunction Lever .........................................32
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................8
Auto Unlock Doors............................................21 Headlights ........................................................32
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................8 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........21 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............8 Automatic Door Locks......................................22 If Equipped ......................................................32
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................9 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................23 High/Low Beam Switch ..................................33
Telescoping Steering Column..........................23 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SEATS ......................................................................23 If Equipped .......................................................33
KEYS ....................................................................... 13 Manual Adjustments........................................23 Flash-To-Pass ..................................................33
Key Fob .............................................................13 Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................26 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............33
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 16 Fold Down Tray — If Equipped .........................26 Parking Lights ..................................................33
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 16 Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped .................27 Headlight Delay ................................................33
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................16 Head Restraints ..............................................27 Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................34
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 17 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — Turn Signals......................................................34
How To Use Remote Start................................18 IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................28 Lane Change Assist..........................................34
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................18 Introducing Voice Recognition.........................28 Battery Saver....................................................34
Remote Start Defrost Mode Activation — Basic Voice Commands ...................................28 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 35
If Equipped........................................................19 Get Started .......................................................29 Courtesy Lights.................................................35
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Additional Information .....................................29 Illuminated Entry ..............................................37
If Equipped........................................................19 MIRRORS ...............................................................29 WIPERS AND WASHERS ...................................... 38
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................29 Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................38
Activation — If Equipped ..................................19 Outside Mirrors ................................................30 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ................38
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................19 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................31 CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 39
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 20 Power Folding Outside Mirrors — Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
To Arm The System ..........................................20 If Equipped........................................................31 Functions ..........................................................39
To Disarm The System .....................................20 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..........................32 Additional Rear Climate Control —
Rearming Of The System .................................20 If Equipped .......................................................42
Security System Manual Override ...................20 Operating Tips ..................................................42
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 43 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ....................59 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................. 73
Storage..............................................................43 Red Warning Lights..........................................59 Ignition Park Interlock (Keyless Vehicle) ........74
USB Control — If Equipped ..............................44 Yellow Warning Lights ......................................61 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Power Outlets ...................................................45 Yellow Indicator Lights .....................................65 System .............................................................74
Power Inverter — If Equipped...........................46 Green Indicator Lights .....................................65 9-Speed Automatic Transmission ...................74
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped .....................47 Blue Indicator Lights ........................................66 POWER STEERING ................................................ 78
Wireless Charging Pad — White Indicator Lights ......................................66 ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER — IF EQUIPPED ............ 79
If Equipped .......................................................47 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ........67 Activation ..........................................................79
WINDOWS ............................................................. 48 Onboard Diagnostic System Exceeding The Set Speed................................79
Power Windows ...............................................48 (OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................68 Deactivation .....................................................79
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped...................49 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST (ISA) —
Wind Buffeting .................................................49 PROGRAMS.............................................................68 IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 79
HOOD....................................................................... 49 Activation ..........................................................80
Opening.............................................................49 STARTING AND OPERATING Exceeding The Set Speed................................80
Closing...............................................................50 STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................69 Deactivation .....................................................80
CARGO AREA FEATURES ...................................... 50 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ... 80
Automatic Transmission ..................................69
Normal Starting ................................................69 Cruise Control ..................................................80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Tip Start Feature .............................................69 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .........................82
INSTRUMENT PANEL Cold Weather Operation TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........... 51 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...............................69 IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 91
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Extended Park Starting ....................................69 Activation/Deactivation ...................................91
Descriptions......................................................52 If Engine Fails To Start.....................................70 Traffic Sign Assist Modes ................................91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 53 After Starting ....................................................70 Indications On The Display ..............................91
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................54 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...........70 ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 55 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ..........70 IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 92
Location And Controls......................................55 PARKING BRAKE....................................................71 Operation..........................................................92
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ....................56 Electric Park Brake (EPB) ................................71 Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off...........93
Main Menu........................................................56 Indications On The Display ..............................94
Vehicle Settings................................................58
Minimum Risk Maneuver.................................95 VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 109 MULTIMEDIA

System Status...................................................95 Vehicle Certification Label............................ 109
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................119
System Operation/Limitations ........................96 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 109
CYBERSECURITY .................................................119
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............... 109
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................120
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 96 Tire Size ......................................................... 109
Rim Size ......................................................... 110 Customer Programmable Features ............. 120
ParkSense Sensors ..........................................97
Inflation Pressure.......................................... 110 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......136
ParkSense Warning Display.............................97
ParkSense Display ...........................................97 Curb Weight ................................................... 110 Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 136
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .............. 100 Overloading.................................................... 110
Loading ......................................................... 110
SAFETY
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 100 TRAILER TOWING................................................ 110 SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................137
ParkSense Park Assist Failure Indications .. 101 Common Towing Definitions......................... 110 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)...................... 137
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 101 Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 112 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 138
ParkSense Park Assist System Usage Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................142
Precautions.................................................... 101 Weight Ratings) ............................................ 113 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................102 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 113 If Equipped ................................................... 142
LaneSense Operation ................................... 102 Towing Requirements .................................. 113 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 103 Towing Tips ................................................... 115 Mitigation — If Equipped............................... 148
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 103 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ... 151
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 105 MOTORHOME) .................................................... 116 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...................154
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............105 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 154
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — Vehicle ........................................................... 116 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 154
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................106 Recreational Towing...................................... 117 Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 154
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...................................108 DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 117 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 161
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message..................... 109 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 117 Child Restraints............................................. 168
Driving Through Water ................................. 118
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................172 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................... 194 Fuses.............................................................. 213
Transporting Passengers .............................. 172 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............................. 195 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 220
Transporting Pets ......................................... 173 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 196 TIRES ....................................................................225
Connected Vehicles....................................... 173 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 196 Tire Safety Information ................................ 225
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Automatic Transmission ............................... 197 Tires — General Information......................... 233
The Vehicle ................................................... 173 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Tire Types....................................................... 236
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................... 197 Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 237
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 174 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 197 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 239
Exhaust Gas................................................... 175 Snow Traction Devices ................................. 240
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 175 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 241
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................... 198 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................242
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 199 Treadwear...................................................... 242
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................176 ENGINE COMPARTMENT.................................... 202
SOS AND ASSIST SYSTEM .................................176 Traction Grades............................................. 242
3.6L Engine .................................................. 202 Temperature Grades..................................... 242
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING..........................180 Checking Oil Level ......................................... 203
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 180 STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................243
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 203 BODYWORK..........................................................243
Jack Location — If Equipped ......................... 181 Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 204
Spare Tire Removal....................................... 182 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 243
Pressure Washing ......................................... 204
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 184 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 243
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 204
Wheel Covers................................................. 187 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 244
Engine Oil....................................................... 205 INTERIORS ...........................................................244
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .....................187 Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 205
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 187 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 244
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 205
Tire Service Kit Components And Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 245
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 206
Operation ....................................................... 187 Leather Surfaces........................................... 245
Body Lubrication ........................................... 207
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .............. 188 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 246
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 207
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .............. 189 Cleaning The Instrument Panel
Exhaust System ............................................ 208
JUMP STARTING...................................................192 Cupholders .................................................... 246
Cooling System.............................................. 209
Preparations For Jump Start......................... 192 Brake System ............................................... 211
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 193 Automatic Transmission ............................... 212
Battery Location ............................................ 194
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION................................254

MOPAR® PARTS ................................................255
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).........247 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................255
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................247 YOUR VEHICLE .................................................... 253
In The 50 United States And
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..247 Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 253
Washington, D.C............................................ 255
Torque Specifications ................................... 247 Prepare A List ................................................ 253
In Canada ...................................................... 255
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................248 Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 253
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................255
3.6L Engine.................................................... 248 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 253
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................256
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 249 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 253
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 249 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 253
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................... 249 Mexico............................................................ 253
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 254
Vehicles.......................................................... 249 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 250 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 254
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 250 Service Contract ........................................... 254
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 250
FLUID CAPACITIES...............................................251
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................251
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................252
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer
case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained
in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements are against operating The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
injury and/or death. builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
These statements are against procedures that
CAUTION! Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
could result in damage to your vehicle.
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
A suggestion which will improve installation, items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
in damage.
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. For any
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer.
TIP:
use of the product or functionality.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer to the
PAGE REFERENCE Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
ARROW body-builders-guide.html.
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
FOOTNOTE WARNING!
Supplementary and relevant information Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
pertaining to the topic. roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Transmission Fault Warning Light 1
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of Ú page 61
each symbol Ú page 59.
NOTE: Engine Temperature Warning Light
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and Ú page 60
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights Brake Warning Light

Ú page 59
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 61 Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 61
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 59 Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 61
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 60 Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 60
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 60 Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 60
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 60 Rear Cargo Door Warning Light
Ú page 61
10
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 62 Ú page 63
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Service Required/Call For Service Warning Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Generic Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light

11
Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light Turn Signal Indicator / Hazard Warning Lights 1
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Keyless System Failure Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Rain Sensor Failure Light Cruise Control Indicator Light

Exterior Lights Failure Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light

Fuel Cutoff Failure Light Active Speed Limiter Set Indicator Light
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light

Ú page 66
12
Blue Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light

Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator Light

White Indicator Lights Ú page 67
Speed Warning Indicator Light

Ú page 67
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light

Ú page 66
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS  With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
KEY F OB commands are disabled. 2
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock all doors, as well as activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
Figure 2 - Keyless Ignition Key Fob
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains an integrated 1 — All Doors Unlock
mechanical key, which can be used by pushing 2 — Emergency Key
the mechanical key release button. Figure 1 - Keyless Ignition Key Fob 3 — Lock
NOTE: 4 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
1 — Front Doors Unlock
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if 5 — PANIC
2 — Cargo Unlock Button
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
3 — Emergency Key
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
4 — Lock In case the ignition switch does not change with the
result in poor performance.
5 — Remote Start (If Equipped) push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected 6 — PANIC
by referring to the instrument cluster display, which will
if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad display directions to follow Ú page 256.
Ú page 47.
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock/Unlock The Doors The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times 1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior emergency key release (1) on the back of the
To lock all of the doors, push and release the lock
lights. key fob and pulling the emergency key out
button once. Push and release the front unlock
NOTE: with your other hand.
button on key fob once to unlock only the front
doors (figure 1) or push and release the unlock  The doors have to be open and then closed in
button on key fob once to unlock all doors (figure order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
2). Push and release the cargo unlock button on a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
key fob once to unlock the cargo area (rear lateral activate until all of the doors are closed.
sliding doors and rear door). The doors can also
 These alerts will not be activated in situations
be locked and unlocked manually by using the
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
mechanical key.
the key fob inside.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
flash and the horn will chirp (if equipped and activated The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 120). If a door NOTE: Emergency Key Removal
is open when the lock button is pushed, the turn signal
 Customers are recommended to use a battery
lights will flash at an increased rate to indicate that a 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
door is still open. 2 — Emergency Key
battery dimensions may not meet the original
Key Left Vehicle Feature OEM coin battery dimensions.
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the  Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob perchlorate for further information.
Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
instrument cluster display along with an interior
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also
be activated to warn the driver.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat 3. Remove the back cover to access and replace Programming And Requesting Additional
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the the battery. When replacing the battery, match Key Fobs
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
to damage the seal during removal. inside of the battery clip, located on the back Programming the key fob may be performed by an
cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your authorized dealer.
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio- NOTE: 2
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
rubbing alcohol. cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two another vehicle.
halves together.
WARNING!
 Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
WARNING!
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell unattended.
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
Separating Case With A Coin  Always remember to place the ignition in the
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
OFF position.
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
Duplication of keys may be performed at an
 If you think a battery may have been swal-
authorized dealer. The VIN is required for
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
authorized dealer replacement of keys.
seek immediate medical attention.
NOTE:
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
Only keys that have been programmed to the
dren. If the battery compartment does not vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle.
close securely, stop using the product and Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a
keep it away from children. vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other
vehicle. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
Key Fob Battery Replacement system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
an authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY NOTE:

A key fob that has not been programmed is also
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents considered an invalid key Ú page 256. OFF
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
 The engine is stopped
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
IGNITION SWITCH  Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION alarm, etc.) are still available
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ON/RUN
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to  Driving position
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.  All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The START/STOP ignition button has three controls, heated seats, etc.)
The system will shut the engine off in two seconds operating modes. The three modes are OFF, START
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. ON/RUN, and START.
 The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the ignition NOTE:
is placed in the ON/RUN position, it indicates that If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
there is a problem with the electronics. pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method
CAUTION! can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not nose side (side opposite of the mechanical key) of
compatible with some aftermarket Remote the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button
Starting systems. Use of these systems may and push to operate the ignition switch.
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
START/STOP Ignition Button
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
 When opening the driver's door and the ignition

WARNING! is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or a chime will sound to remind you to place the
in a location accessible to children, and do not ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the chime, the message “Vehicle ON” will display in
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power the cluster. 2
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.  The ignition will automatically switch to the OFF
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked position if the following vehicle conditions last
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup for 30 minutes: ignition placed in ON/RUN posi-
may cause serious injury or death. tion, gear is in PARK and engine is off.
Backup Starting Method
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! CAUTION! This system uses the key fob to start the
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. engine conveniently from outside the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock vehicle while still maintaining security.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The system has a range of approximately
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
300 ft (91 m).
access to an unlocked vehicle.
NOTE: Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
vehicle.
dren should be warned not to touch the parking to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. device; these devices may block the key fob’s NOTE:
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob
(Continued) may reduce this range Ú page 256.
Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
 For more information on normal engine starting,
see Ú page 69.
 The park lights will turn on and remain on during

WARNING! Remote Start mode. WARNING!
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage  For security, power window is disabled when the  Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
serious injury or death when inhaled. serious injury or death when inhaled.
repeated for a third cycle.
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation All of the following conditions must be met before  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door the engine will Remote Start: of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.  Gear selector in PARK injury or death.
 Doors closed
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  Hood closed TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE

 Rear cargo doors closed
Push and release the Remote Start button on the To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle  Hazard switch off system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the  Battery at an acceptable charge level
end of the 15 minute cycle.
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.  PANIC button not pushed
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts  Fuel meets minimum requirement if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
the engine off.  System not disabled from previous Remote cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
NOTE: Start event position, the climate controls will resume the previously
 Vehicle Security system not active set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
 Remote Start can only be used twice.  Ignition in OFF position
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, Remote Start request.
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
 In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or DE–ICER A CTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED
below, the climate settings will default to
display in the instrument cluster display until you maximum heat, with fresh air entering the When Remote Start is active and the outside
push the START/STOP ignition button. cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
REMOTE START D EFROST MODE vehicle will enter Mix Mode. the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting 2
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
 In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
timer and operation will continue.
When Remote Start is active, and the outside on the last settings selected by the driver.
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or REMOTE START ABORT M ESSAGE
system will automatically activate rear defrost for above, the climate settings will default to MAX
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the The following messages will display in the
A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
the system will automatically adjust the settings For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote control settings, see Ú page 39.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next NOTE:  Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
section for detailed operation. These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the  Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will  Remote Start Cancelled — Rear Cargo Door Open
I F EQUIPPED change, and exit the automatic defaults, if  Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
When Remote Start is activated, the rear defrost  Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
climate controls off using the OFF button.  Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.  Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

If a door or the hood is not properly shut, the
SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle system will be armed. The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. the doors using the manual door lock. The Vehicle
When the Vehicle Security system is activated, TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM Security system will not disarm if you unlock the
interior switches for door locks are disabled. The doors using the manual door unlock.
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
system provides both audible and visible signals. any of the following methods:
For the first three minutes, the horn will sound, and
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
DOORS
the turn signal lights will flash. For an additional
15 minutes, only the turn signal lights will flash.  Push the Passive Entry button next to the door POWER D OOR L OCKS
handle to unlock the door Ú page 21.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM The central lock/unlock button has an LED that
 Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security disarm the system.
system: Push the lock button on the instrument panel.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect The indicator light will illuminate to show the doors
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in your vehicle. However, you can create conditions are locked.
the OFF position. where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
Push the lock button on the instrument panel a
2. If any doors are open, close them. of the previously described arming sequences has
second time to unlock the doors.
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
the vehicle:
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail- Security system.
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 21.
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Security system will rearm itself after the
Vehicle Security Light (on the central lock\unlock 15 additional minutes of turn lamps flashing.
button in the dashboard) will begin to flash every If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
three seconds until it is disarmed. present, the system will ignore that condition and
Lock Button On Instrument Panel
monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door Once the doors have been locked with the key fob,
handle to the detent. it will no longer be possible to unlock them by CAUTION!
The load compartment power door lock switch is pushing the central lock/unlock button. An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
located on the driver door trim panel. Use this the key fob from the vehicle and lock all of the doors
switch to lock or unlock the load compartment WARNING! when leaving the vehicle unattended.
doors.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked 2
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup AUTO UNLOCK DOORS
may cause serious injury or death.
This feature unlocks all front doors when one front
 For personal security and safety in the event
door is opened.
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the NOTE:
vehicle. If the rear or side door is open, only the rear or side
door is unlocked.
 Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle, and If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings
lock all doors. and lock your vehicle. Ú page 120, this feature will unlock all the doors
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with and in PARK.
The load compartment lock/unlock button has an access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
LED that indicates whether the rear doors are be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
locked or unlocked. number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- E NTRY
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
 LED ON: Doors locked. Push the left side of the
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
central lock/unlock button once again to centrally
gear selector. vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n
unlock all doors. The LED will switch off.
Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock
 LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the right side of  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
the central lock/unlock button again to centrally or in a location accessible to children. A child
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
lock all doors. The doors will be locked only if all could operate power windows, other controls,
the doors are properly closed. or move the vehicle.
NOTE:  Unlock the load compartment doors only if the NOTE:

 Passive Entry may be programmed on or off Uconnect setting is set to "Approach" and you  After pushing the door handle button, you must
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 120. press the button located next to the rear handle. wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
 The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle  The Passive Entry feature will be disabled if the the doors, using either Passive Entry door
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a Uconnect setting is set to "Off". handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; NOTE: vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless without the vehicle unlocking.
 Either the load compartment and cabin
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system compartment or all doors will unlock when you  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
from locking/unlocking the vehicle. press Passive Entry button, depending on the key fob battery is depleted.
 Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated selected setting in the Uconnect system  When the key fob battery is low, the instrument
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi- Ú page 120. cluster will display a message indicating that
tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors the key fob battery is low Ú page 256.
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
signal lamps. within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the When enabled, the door locks will lock
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and vehicle. automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the 12 mph (20 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the be enabled or disabled through the Uconnect
Vehicle Security system. system Ú page 120.
To Unlock From The Driver, Passenger or Rear
Door
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, push the Passive Entry
button next to the handle to unlock the vehicle.
 Unlock the front doors only if the Uconnect
setting is set to "Approach" and you press the
button located next to the front handle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
STEERING WHEEL WARNING! MANUAL A DJUSTMENTS

The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
TELESCOPING STEERING C OLUMN Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
forward/rearward and reclined. Front and rear height
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten the driving with the steering column unlocked, could and lumbar can also be adjusted (if equipped).
steering column. The telescoping control handle is cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. 2
located below the steering wheel at the end of the Failure to follow this warning may result in
steering column. serious injury or death.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside Seat Adjustment (Without Swivel Seat)
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- 1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
Telescoping Control Handle ously injured or killed. 2 — Front Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Rear Height Adjustment Lever
To unlock the steering column, pull the control  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and 4 — Recliner Knob
handle up. To lengthen or shorten the steering
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these 5 — Lumbar Knob
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
position, push the control handle down until fully killed.
engaged.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment Recliner Adjustment

The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near Without Swivel Seat
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat. To recline the seatback, lean back, rotate the
seat is in the desired position. Then, using body knob rearward to position the seatback as desired.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat To return the seatback to its normal upright position,
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the
Height Adjustment seatback is in the upright position.
Without Swivel Seat With Swivel Seat
Seat Adjustment (With Swivel Seat) The height adjustment levers are located on the The recliner lever is located at the lower front
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback,
1 — Lumbar Knob
front lever to adjust the front of the seat, or lift up lean forward slightly, pull the lever outward, lean
2 — Recline Lever on the rear lever to adjust the rear of the seat. back to the desired position and release the lever.
3 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar To return the seatback to its normal upright
 To raise the front or rear of the seat, lift the
4 — Front Height Adjustment Knob position, lean forward and pull the lever outward.
appropriate lever while none or minimal weight
5 — Rear Height Adjustment Knob Release the lever once the seatback is in the
is applied to the seat.
upright position.
 To lower the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while seated or applying WARNING!
WARNING!
weight to the seat.
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
With Swivel Seat dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a The height adjustment knobs are located on the could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
collision and serious injury or death. center outboard side of the seat. Rotate the front might not be adjusted properly and you could
knob to adjust the front of the seat up or down. be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the Rotate the rear knob to adjust the rear of the seat vehicle is parked.
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. up or down. (Continued)
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Damper Weight Adjustment

WARNING!
Use the weight adjustment knob, located on the
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that inboard side of the seat, to set the required setting
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against based on body weight, with settings between 88 lb
your chest. In a collision, you could slide under (40 kg) and 286 lb (130 kg).
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally 2
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped

Swivel Seat Lever
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking swivel
knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of seats, the seats must be locked in the facing
the driver's seatback. Rotate the control forward to forward position while driving. If the seats are not
increase and rearward to decrease the desired in the correct position, a warning will appear in the
amount of lumbar support. instrument cluster display.
Weight Adjustment Knob
Suspension Seat — If Equipped If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring
Swivel Seat — If Equipped in the facing forward position before the first
system and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure The swivel seat lever is located at the lower front vehicle movement, shifting out of park is not
maximum comfort and safety. The system of inboard side of the seat. The seat may be turned allowed until the seats are both locked in the
springs also effectively absorbs impact from through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side facing forward position. When the seats are not in
uneven road surfaces. and approximately 35° toward the door. The seat the right position and the first vehicle movement
may be locked in the driving position or at the after ignition START is attempted, a chime and a
180° position. To swivel the seat, pull the swivel message will appear in the instrument cluster
seat inboard lever outward, turn the seat to the display. Rotate and lock the swivel seats in the
desired position and release the lever. correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked

in the facing forward position during movement WARNING!
of the vehicle, a message will appear in the  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
instrument cluster display and an intermittent that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
chime will sound until key-off or until the swivel or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
seats are locked in the facing forward position. overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
Stop and move the swivel seats in the correct heated could cause serious burns due to the
position before proceeding. increased surface temperature of the seat.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not
possible to check the correct position of the swivel FOLD DOWN T RAY — IF EQUIPPED
seats, a message and the generic warning light Heated Seat Switch
appears in the instrument cluster display to inform If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat, the
about the failure. In these conditions, check the Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. seat is equipped with a fold-down tray that can be
status of the swivel seats and do not drive the Push the switch a second time to shut the heating used as a document support surface. To use the
vehicle until the swivel seats are locked in the elements off. fold-down tray, grab the pull tab and lower the tray.
facing forward position. NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED within two to five minutes.
On some models, the front driver and
passenger seats may be equipped with WARNING!
heaters in both the seat cushions and  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
seatbacks. The controls for the front skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
heated seats are located on the lower outboard diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
side of the seat. alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long Lowering The Fold-Down Tray
periods of time.
(Continued)
The fold-down tray is equipped with two cup HEAD R ESTRAINTS

holders and a support surface with a paper
holder clip. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
2
above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should not
Adjuster Wheel Location operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to adjust positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
the height of the armrest up or down. injury in the event of a crash.
Closing The Fold-Down Tray
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS — IF E QUIPPED while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and or removed could cause serious injury or
adjusted for height. Underneath the front of the death in the event of a collision.
armrest is the adjuster wheel which will adjust the
height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel
Front Head Restraint Adjustment Front Head Restraint Removal UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and IF EQUIPPED
the adjustment button located on the base of the the release button at the base of each post while
head restraint and push downward on the head pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
restraint. restraint, push the adjustment button and the Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
release button at the base of each post and put the helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
head restraint posts into the holes. Then, adjust it Commands and tips you need to know to control
to the appropriate height. your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
NOTE: NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees Voice Recognition is only available on the
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi- Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display.
tional clearance to the back of the head.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
WARNING!
The following can be given at any point while using
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision your Uconnect system.
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
Adjustment Buttons Push the VR button and after the beep, say a
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the command. You can also say the system “Wake Up”
1 — Release Button
occupant compartment. word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”, and then say
2 — Adjustment Button a command. The factory default Wake Up word is
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
NOTE: the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees Follow the preceding reinstallation instruc-
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additions prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
tional clearance to the back of the head.
Commands.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET S TARTED For Uconnect system support, call

1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
your Voice Recognition system. You can also use DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
the system’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice
recognition. The “Wake Up” word can be set MIRRORS 2
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 120.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and Manual Mirror — If Equipped
passenger conversations are examples of noise
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
that may impact recognition.
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume 1 — Push To Answer a Phone Call on the view through the rear window.
while facing straight ahead. 2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, small control under the mirror to the night position
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
Voice Command. Also, you can say the vehicle Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
“Wake Up” word to issue a Voice Command. 2 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: the windshield).
The available “Wake Up” words are “Hey Uconnect” Push The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming
and “Hey Ram”. Phone Call
 You can interrupt the help message or system 3 — Push To End A Phone Call
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are Adjusting Rearview Mirror
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 256.
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped Push the menu button next to the on/off control to
access the following mirror options:
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road  Brightness
behind while driving.  Tilt
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic  Pan (if equipped)
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
Rearview Mirror mode.
menu options.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
rearward toward the driver. Camera Location
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE: OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective when
driving in the following conditions: To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
 Nighttime in low light applications
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
 Bad weather conditions (e.g. extreme haze, inside mirror.
snow/slush)
If it becomes difficult to see clearly in the display, WARNING!
Digital Rearview Mirror the camera may need to be cleaned. If snow, ice, Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
1 — On/Off Control mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and than they really are. Relying too much on side
2 — Menu Button
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left
upper, left lower, right upper or right lower mirror
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be folded
positions indicated by one of the four arrows on the
forward or rearward to avoid damage. The hinges
switch. Tilt the control knob in the direction you want
have three detent positions:
the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the
 Full forward position mirror, turn the control to the center O (off) position to 2
 Full rearward position prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
 Normal position NOTE:
 If your vehicle is equipped with a power blind
POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED spot mirror, you can adjust them when the
The power mirror controls are located on the control knob is positioned to the lower arrows. Power Folding Mirror Switch
driver’s side door trim panel.  The vehicle must be in ON/RUN to adjust the 1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
mirrors. 2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
POWER F OLDING OUTSIDE M IRRORS —
I F E QUIPPED The power folding mirrors are designed to be
folded and unfolded using the power folding
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward switch. If the mirrors are manually folded, the
and unfolded into the normal driving position. mirror head may appear loose.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located on If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight amount
the driver’s door panel below the power mirror controls. of play, the mirror should be power folded closed,
Push the switch to the right and the mirrors will fold in, then power folded open (this may require multiple
push the switch to the left and the mirrors will return to button pushes).
Power Mirror Controls the normal driving position. NOTE:
The intended use of the power folding mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the mirrors.
Only manually fold the mirrors when necessary.
Forward Folding HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by lever back to the O (off) position.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
accidental impact. In this case it is possible to
or ice. This feature will be activated
NOTE:
restore to position both ways, manually and On vehicles sold in Canada, the rear parking lights,
whenever you turn on the rear window
electrically (as previously described). clearance lights, and Daytime Running Lights
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 39.
(DRLs) will turn on when the headlight switch is
rotated to the O (off) position.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER I F E QUIPPED
The multifunction lever controls the operation
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will come on
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
when the ignition is in the ON position and the
headlight beam selection and the passing lights.
vehicle is in DRIVE or NEUTRAL.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column. To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the O (off) position or the
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions AUTO position.
1 — Normal Driving Position

NOTE:
2 — Fold In Position  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
3 — Fold Forward Position
when the front fog lights are turned on.
Multifunction Lever  The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRLs.
CAUTION! HEADLIGHTS
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
Leaving the mirror in a non-powered position, To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
accidental impact or manual fold, may cause may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
multifunction lever to the headlight position. When of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
permanent damage to the mirror. Electrically the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
restore the mirror to its normal position, as soon that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
taillights, license plate light, clearance lights and the hazard warning lights are activated).
as practical. instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
HIGH/LOW B EAM S WITCH  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and HEADLIGHT DELAY
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
With the low beams activated, push the multifunction cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to When this feature is selected, the driver can
lever toward the instrument panel to turn on the high the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc- choose to have the headlights remain on for a
beams. The High Beam Indicator Light will illuminate in tions on the windshield or camera lens will preset period of time after the engine is turned off.
the instrument cluster to indicated that the high beams cause the system to function improperly. Activation 2
are on. Push the multifunction lever a second time to
 When set to AUTO, the system automatically To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
switch the headlights back to low beam. When the
turns the headlights on or off based on ambient the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
ignition is placed in the OFF position, both the high and
light levels. Then, rotate the multifunction lever to the O (off)
low beams will turn off.
position within two minutes. The delay interval
AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP FLASH-TO-P ASS begins when the headlight switch is turned from
CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED You can signal another vehicle with your headlights O (off) to the low beam position. If the headlight
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. switch is in AUTO position and headlights were on
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, before the ignition is OFF, the delay interval begins
system provides increased forward lighting at night and remain on, until the lever is released. automatically.
by automating high beam control through the use Deactivation
of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
This camera detects vehicle specific light and The feature is disabled by turning on the
To turn on the automatic headlights, turn the end headlights, the parking lights or by placing the
automatically switches from high beams to low of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. To
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. ignition in the RUN position. If you shut off the
turn off the automatic headlights, turn the end of lights before the ignition is turned on, they will turn
NOTE: the multifunction lever back to the O (off) position. off in the normal manner.
 The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position in order for the Automatic High
PARKING LIGHTS Headlights with ignition in the OFF position.
Beam Headlamp Control to activate. These lights can be turned on, with the ignition in the With the ignition in the OFF position, the headlights
OFF position, by moving the end of the multifunction can be switched on for a maximum time of
 The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
lever to O (off) position and then to the headlight 8 minutes. To turn on the headlights with the
can be turned on or off through Uconnect ignition in the OFF position, turn the end of the
Settings Ú page 120. position.
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
The indicator light in the instrument panel comes
on. The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is
performed.
NOTE: Cornering Lights LANE CHANGE ASSIST

If the headlight delay function is disabled in the The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
Uconnect Setting, when you put the ignition in the Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
OFF position with the multifunction lever already without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
set in the headlight position, the headlights remain signal will flash five times then automatically
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
on for 8 minutes. turn off.
turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED the Uconnect system Ú page 120. BATTERY SAVER
The fog light switch is located on the instrument TURN SIGNALS To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, when
panel to the left of the steering column. the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will
turn off.
parking lights or the low beam headlights flash to show proper operation of the front and rear
and push the fog light button. To turn off turn signals. NOTE:
the front fog lights, push the fog light Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
NOTE:
button a second time or turn off the headlight placed in the ON/RUN position.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a
switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the
NOTE: turn signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp
The fog lights will operate with the low beam head- will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
lights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam If either light remains on and does not flash, or
headlights will turn off the fog lights. there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, the fog lights outside light bulb.
will also turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Dome Lights Rear Lights

The interior lights can be set to three different Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Cargo
COURTESY LIGHTS positions (off/left position, center position, Lamp located at the upper rear cargo area above
on/right position). Using the switch on the the rear doors.
These lights are mounted between the sun visors bottom of the overhead console:
on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by 2
pushing the corresponding switch.  Push the switch to the on/right position from its
center position and the lights are always on.
 Push the switch to the off/left position from its
center position and the lights are always off.
 Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lights are turned on and off when the doors are
opened or closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the
overhead console control the map or reading Rear Cargo Lamp Location
function of the lights. Push the switch on the right Your vehicle may also be equipped with a Side
Courtesy Lights to turn the right light on; push again to turn off. Cargo Lamp located at the upper rear area of the
Push the switch on the left to turn the left light on; passenger side sliding door opening.
1 — Ambient Light push again to turn off.
2 — Left Map Light
3 — Off/Left Position CAUTION!
4 — Center Position Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
5 — Right Map Light switch is in the center position or that the lights
6 — On/Right Position are off to avoid draining the battery.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side of
the instrument panel below the instrument cluster
display.
Side Cargo Lamp Location Ceiling Cargo Lamp

The Rear and Side Cargo Lamps can be set to three The Ceiling Cargo Lamp can be set to three different
different positions by pushing the lens to the right, positions (off/left position, center position, on/right
left, or center positions. position).
 Push the lens to the right from its center posi-  Push the switch to the left from its center posi- Dimmer Controls
tion and the lamp is always off. tion and the lamp is always off.
Pushing the “+” or “–” button will increase or
 Leave the lens in the center position, and the  Leave the switch in the center position, and the
decrease the brightness of the instrument panel
lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors
lights, cupholder lights, and footwell lights, as long
or rear doors are opened or closed. or rear doors are opened or closed. The Ceiling
as the headlights or parking lights are on.
 Push the lens to the left from its center position Cargo Lamp is also equipped with a movement
sensor that will switch the light on when move- If the “-” button is pushed until the instrument
and the lamp is always on.
ment is detected. panel lights turn off, the interior lights will remain
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a cargo off when the vehicle’s doors are opened.
lamp on the center of the ceiling of the cargo area.  Push the switch to the right from its center posi-
tion and the lamp is always on. If the “+” button is pushed until the interior lights
turn on, the interior lights will remain on when the
NOTE:
vehicle’s doors are closed.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
lamp will stay on for about 15 minutes and then
time out.
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen Ambient LED Lighting — If Equipped  When one of the rear doors is opened, the rear
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can be dome light will illuminate for approximately
Your vehicle may be equipped with LED lighting in
dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer control three minutes.
the front footwells and center cup holders. The
when the parking lights or headlights are on. brightness of the lights can be adjusted using the  When the front doors are closed, the front dome
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the dimmer controls, located on the left side of the light will automatically shut off after approxi-
Uconnect system, the brightness will automatically instrument panel, as long as the headlights are mately 27 seconds. 2
adjust from daytime intensity to nighttime intensity turned on.  When the rear doors are closed, the rear dome
(and vice versa) based on ambient light levels light will automatically shut off after approxi-
outside of the vehicle.
I LLUMINATED ENTRY mately 27 seconds. The timing stops once the
NOTE: The courtesy lights will turn on when you use ignition is placed in the RUN or ON position.
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door. The dome light will turn off under any of the
cannot be adjusted when the dimmer control is They also turn on when unlocking or opening following conditions:
at the maximum setting (interior lights on), even manually from the driver door cylinder.
 The dome light is disabled when the ignition is
when Display Mode is set to Auto within the The lights will fade to off after approximately placed in the RUN or ON position.
Uconnect Settings. 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is changed to the ON/RUN  The dome lights will turn off automatically when
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the the doors are locked.
brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen will adjust position from the OFF position.
to the set brightness (1 - 6) when the headlights The dome lights illuminate in the following ways: NOTE:
are either on or off. For more information on these  The front courtesy overhead console and door
 When the doors are unlocked, the dome light
Uconnect Settings, see Ú page 120. courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer
will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
control is in the “Dome ON” position.
Ambient Light  When one of the front doors is opened, the front
 The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the dome light will illuminate for approximately
three minutes. dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position.
dome lamp. The ambient light will be on all the
time, with the option of dimming it with the dimmer
controls as long as the headlights are turned on.
WIPERS AND WASHERS WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the first pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the right side of the steering column. There are two detent positions for intermittent settings, the the windshield. The wash function must be used in
five different modes of operation for the front third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can for high wiper operation.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
be raised or lowered to access the modes. Windshield Washers see Ú page 207.
NOTE: To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/
The windshield wipers/washers will only operate washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate.
RAIN SENSING W IPERS — I F EQUIPPED
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The wipers will activate automatically for three This feature senses moisture on the windshield
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the
the intermittent interval previously selected. end of the multifunction lever to one of two detent
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers positions for intermittent settings to activate this
will operate for three cycles and then turn off. feature.
NOTE:
WARNING! If the windshield wiper lever is rotated from the
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield O (off) position to the first intermittent setting or
could lead to a collision. You might not see other from the first intermittent setting to the second
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden intermittent setting, the wipers will perform an
icing of the windshield during freezing weather, immediate wipe cycle to clean the windshield.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever warm the windshield with the defroster before The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
and during windshield washer use. the windshield wiper lever. Wiper delay position
1 — Pull Back For Front Washer one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position
2 — Rotate For Intermittent Settings two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in
Mist
3 — Push Upward For Mist the O (off) position when not using the system.
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL

 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the equipped with a Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in
the windshield. three ways: 2
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-  Moving the lever from the O (off) position to the
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. intermittent positions.
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and  One Mist command actuation.
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 120.  The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and
The Rain Sensing system has protection features the rain sensor detects the presence of rain.
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate NOTE:
under the following conditions: In the event of a rain sensor failure, a dedicated Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display With Manual
 Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition telltale on the instrument cluster will appear to Climate Controls
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain warn the customer (if equipped).
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than CLIMATE CONTROLS
3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
greater than 32°F (0°C).
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing the instrument panel below the radio.
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position. Uconnect 5 NAV With 7-inch Display With Manual Climate
Controls
MAX A/C Button — If Equipped Recirculation Button MAX Defrost Button

Press and release the MAX A/C button on Press and release this button to change the Push the MAX Defrost button to change
the touchscreen to change the current system between recirculation mode and the current airflow setting to Defrost
setting to the coldest output of air. outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator mode. The indicator illuminates when
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when and the A/C indicator illuminate when the this feature is on. Max defrost set
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be maximum temperature setting for best windshield
the MAX A/C operation to exit. used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, and side window defrosting and defogging. If MAX
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate Control
A/C Button — If Equipped
used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may system will return to the previous setting. Air
Push the A/C button to engage the Air be unavailable if conditions exist that could create comes from the windshield and side window
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be demist outlets.
illuminates when A/C is on. deselected manually without disturbing the mode
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
NOTE: control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window Push and release the Rear Defrost
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not Control button to turn on the rear window
Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be defroster and the heated outside mirrors
turned off, but the A/C system could remain recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming, (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
active to prevent fogging of the windows. illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side The rear window defroster automatically turns off
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
after 10 minutes the first time it is activated after
speed if needed. the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode
the first key cycle. If the key cycle is engaged again,
to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
 If your air conditioning performance seems the rear window defroster will automatically turn
is disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C off 5 minutes after it is activated.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for causes the LED in the control button to blink and then
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a turns off.
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
You can also adjust the temperature using the Panel Mode
CAUTION! sliding temperature bar on the touchscreen.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Failure to follow these cautions can cause Slide the bar upward into the red to increase the
panel. Each of these outlets can be
damage to the heating elements: temperature, and slide it downward into the blue to
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
decrease the temperature.
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear The air vents out of the center outlets and
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners Blower Control outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to 2
on the interior surface of the window. Use a Blower Control regulates the amount of side to regulate airflow direction. Move the vent to the
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping air forced through the climate system. furthermost sides to close the vent.
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can There are seven blower speeds available. Bi-Level Mode
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. The blower speed increases as you press
Air comes from the instrument panel
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or the up arrow above the blower control symbol.
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
abrasive window cleaners on the interior The blower speed decreases as you press the
of air is directed through the defrost and
surface of the window. down arrow below the blower control symbol.
side window demister outlets.
You can also adjust the blower speed on the
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. NOTE:
touchscreen by selecting a speed on the blower bar.
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
Mode Control tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
Temperature Control and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of buttons on the touchscreen, or the faceplate, Floor Mode
the air forced through the climate system. to change the airflow distribution mode. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
The temperature increases as you press Pushing this button will cycle through the five amount of air is directed through the defrost
the red arrow button on the faceplate. mode combinations in order: Face, Face/Feet, Feet, and side window demister outlets.
Windshield/Feet, Windshield. The cycle will repeat if
The temperature decreases as you press the button is continually pushed.
the blue arrow button on the faceplate. NOTE:
The distribution modes on the climate control
screen will also illuminate when a selection is
made using the button on the instrument panel.
Defrost Mode ADDITIONAL R EAR C LIMATE C ONTROL — OPERATING T IPS

Air comes from the windshield and side I F E QUIPPED Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
window demist outlets. When the defrost suggested control settings for various weather
button is selected, the blower level may These switches, mounted on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column, activate the conditions.
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side additional rear heating/air conditioning system. Summer Operation
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the NOTE: The engine cooling system must be protected with
front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system These switches must be enabled for operation by a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
will return to the previous setting. the Upfitter. corrosion protection and to protect against engine
Mix Mode overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
and side window demister outlets. and 50% water is recommended Ú page 251.
This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the Winter Operation
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
comfort while reducing moisture on the performance, make sure the engine cooling
windshield. system is functioning properly and the proper
Climate Control OFF Button amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the air Recirculation mode during
Press and release this button to turn the Winter months is not recommended because it
Climate Control ON/OFF. Additional Rear Climate Controls Switches
may cause window fogging.
Rear Blower Control Vacation Storage
Push this button to turn on the rear climate For information on maintaining the Climate Control
controls. An indicator light will turn on when system when the vehicle is being stored for an
the rear climate control is on. extended period of time, see Ú page 243.
Window Fogging Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower Set the mode control to
(Panel mode), (A/C) on, Glove Compartments
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C Hot Weather
for long periods, as fogging may occur. and blower on high. Roll down The glove compartment is located on the 2
And Vehicle passenger side of the instrument panel and
the windows for a minute to
Outside Air Intake Interior Is Very
flush out the hot air. Adjust features both an upper and lower storage area.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the Hot
the controls as needed to
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. achieve comfort.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
Turn (A/C) on and set the
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
Warm Weather mode control to (Panel
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is
Mode).
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to Set the mode control to
Cool & Humid
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced (Mix Mode) and turn on
Conditions
when needed. (A/C) to keep windows clear.
Glove Compartments
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield 1 — Upper Glove Compartment
Cold Weather
fogging starts to occur, move 2 — Lower Glove Compartment
the control to (Mix Mode).
Dash Storage NOTE:

The dash storage is located on the right side of the Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
instrument panel. both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
Underseat Storage Tray larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
USB C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
 “A new device is now connected. Previous
The USB ports are located on the instrument panel to connection was lost”.
Dash Storage the right of the radio. This feature allows an external
 “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) — USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
connection was lost”.
If Equipped Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
 “Another device is in use through the same USB
A storage tray is located under the driver’s seat. may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
To remove the tray, lift up on the tray to withdraw it features, if equipped. For further information, refer
the second device”.
from the hooks on the support base, then slide the to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement. Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
tray out from under the seat.
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
USB Charging Port 2
The USB connector port can be used for charging
purposes only. Use the connection cable to
connect an external USB device to the vehicle's
USB charging port.
AUX Jack And USB Ports Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
1 — Media USB C and A Ports If the device battery to be charged is completely Load Compartment Power Outlet — If Equipped
2 — Charge Only USB C and A Ports depleted, it may take awhile to charge. The load compartment power outlet is located in
the rear cargo compartment. The outlet can be is
WARNING! used for powering 12 Volt adapter accessories and
By using a USB cable to connect an external
device: Do not plug in or remove the external device recharging communications devices.
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
 The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
result in a collision.
system, providing the artist, track title, and
album information on the radio display.
NOTE: POWER O UTLETS
Depending on track configuration, track infor- Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
mation may not be present on the radio display.
The power outlet is located on the instrument
 The device can be controlled using the radio
panel to the right of the radio. It only operates with
buttons to play, and browse the contents of the
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
device.
 The audio device battery charges when plugged
into the USB port. Load Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
WARNING!
POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by  Close the lid when not in use and while driving There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
using unsuitable adapters. the vehicle. located on the instrument panel, to the right of
the radio, to convert DC current to AC current.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
electric shock and failure. and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
CAUTION!
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
Power Outlet Fuses — Under Hood and/or prevent the engine from starting.
1 — F14 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Front Power Outlet  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
2 — F09 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution. Power Inverter Location
WARNING!  After the use of high power draw accessories,
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
To avoid serious injury or death: the device. The outlet automatically turns off when
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
the device is unplugged.
 Only devices designed for use in this type of must be driven a sufficient length of time to
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
outlet. battery.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
The power inverter is designed with built-in WIRELESS C HARGING PAD —

overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will I F E QUIPPED
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid 2
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death: Auxiliary Switches
 Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. Auxiliary Switch 1 is configured to constant battery
feed, while Auxiliary Switch 2 is configured to
 Do not touch with wet hands.
ignition feed. Wireless Charging Pad
 Close the lid when not in use.
For further information on using the auxiliary Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s wireless charging pad located below the center
electric shock and failure. Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com stack. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly
and choosing the appropriate links. charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a
standard that allows wireless charging of your
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — I F EQUIPPED mobile phone.
Your vehicle may be equipped with two auxiliary Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
switches located on the instrument panel to the charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless
left of the steering column which can be used to charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
power various electronic devices. Connections to specialized back plate can be purchased from your
the switches are found in the right central pillar mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
fuse panel at the base of the passenger side Please see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
B-pillar. information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an

anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place,
WINDOWS WARNING!
and an LED indicator light. POWER W INDOWS  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
LED Indicator Status: access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
The control on the left front door panel has dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
NOTE: switches that control all power windows. There is a for a number of reasons. A child or others could
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless single opening and closing switch on the front be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
charging. passenger door for passenger window control. be warned not to touch the parking brake,
 No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a brake pedal or the gear selector.
device.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
 Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging. or in a location accessible to children. A child
 Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign could operate power windows, other controls,
object is detected. or move the vehicle.
With a compatible mobile phone placed on the
charging pad, when the ignition is switched to the Automatic Window Features
OFF position, a phone reminder message will
appear on the instrument cluster to warn the Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
customer. The window switches may be equipped with an
Power Window Switches Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for
CAUTION! half a second, release, and the window will go
NOTE: down automatically.
The key fob should not be placed on the The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. To stop the window from going all the way down
power windows to operate for up to three minutes during the auto-down operation, pull up or push
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close down on the switch briefly.
This feature is canceled when either front door is
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from opened. To open the window part way, lift the window
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the switch to the detent for less than half a second and
vehicle from starting. release it to stop the window.
WINDOW B AR G RATES — IF EQUIPPED WIND B UFFETING HOOD

This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
over the sliding door windows. This feature is a part pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
OPENING
of the vehicle’s safety system, and is designed to ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the To open the hood, two latches must be released.
protect you and your passengers in the event of an windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the 2
accident. open or partially open positions. This is a normal
side of the instrument panel.
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Window Bar Grates

Hood Release
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door windows
are designed to protect you in the event of an
accident. Modification or removal of the grates
could lead to serious injury or death.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into CLOSING

the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the right to WARNING!
release it, before raising the hood.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod Slot

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
CAUTION!
 Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
in closed position before closing the hood.
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in Damage may occur.  Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
hood slot to secure the hood in the open downward push at the center front edge of the
position. hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
CARGO AREA FEATURES

The cargo area may be equipped with different
options such as optional side panels, rear seats
and an optional floor.
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 5. Temperature Gauge

CAUTION!
DESCRIPTIONS  The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
1. Speedometer normal range indicates that the engine damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
 Indicates vehicle speed. cooling system is operating satisfactorily. reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
2. Instrument Cluster Display  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
higher temperature when driving in hot the pointer drops back into the normal range.
 The instrument cluster display features a
weather or up mountain grades. It should If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the
driver interactive display Ú page 55.
not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of engine off immediately and call an authorized
3. Tachometer the normal operating range. dealer for service.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000). WARNING!
NOTE:
4. Fuel Gauge A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
 The gauge shows the level of fuel in the others could be badly burned by steam or boiling when the ignition is first cycled.
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
ON/RUN position. dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 209.
 The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS  Gear Selector Status (PRND)

CAUTION!
The gear selector status “P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4,
1. Tachometer Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
etc.” are displayed indicating the gear selector
 This gauge measures engine revolutions position. Telltales “1, 2, 3, 4, etc.” indicate the damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
per minute (RPM x 1000). Before the manual mode has been engaged and the gear reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
pointer reaches the red area, ease up on selected is displayed Ú page 73. vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the accelerator to prevent engine damage. 3. Temperature Gauge the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
2. Instrument Cluster Display the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
 The temperature gauge shows engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this coolant temperature. Any reading within the service.
display shows instrument cluster display normal range indicates that the engine
messages Ú page 55. cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
4. Fuel Gauge
 Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area  The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
US Federal regulations require that upon
or up mountain grades. It should not be fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the ON/RUN position.
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the
vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs normal operating range.  The fuel pump symbol points to
to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician the side of the vehicle where the
should leave the odometer reading the same as WARNING! fuel door is located Ú page 108.
it was before the repair or service. If the techni- A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or 5. Speedometer
cian cannot do so, then the odometer must be others could be badly burned by steam or boiling  Indicates vehicle speed.
set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the coolant. You may want to call an authorized
door jamb stating what the mileage was before dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that
it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker
is accurate if the odometer must be reset at
zero.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s systems 3
and features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
Instrument Cluster Display and Controls Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
display can show you how systems are working and give
you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel 1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen 1 — Left Arrow Button
mounted controls allow you to scroll through the main 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls 2 — Up Arrow Button
menus and submenus. You can access the specific 3 — Right Arrow Button
information you want and make selections and
This system allows the driver to select a variety 4 — Down Arrow Button
adjustments.
of useful information by pushing the switches 5 — OK Button
LOCATION AND CONTROLS mounted on the instrument panel. Examples of
menu items are:
The instrument cluster display features a driver  Left Arrow Button
interactive display that is located in the instrument  Buzzer Volume
Push and release the left arrow button to access
cluster.  Exit Menu the information screens or submenu screens of
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some a main menu item.
customer programmable features will display in  Up Arrow Button
the radio Ú page 120. Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
The system allows the driver to select information upward through the main menu and submenus.
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column:
 Right Arrow Button  Pushing the OK button makes the selection and NOTE:
Push and release the right arrow button to a confirmation screen will appear (returning the If the indicator message illuminates when you start
access the information screens or submenu user to the first page of the submenu). the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
screens of a main menu item. reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
 Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
 Down Arrow Button submenu layer and return to the main menu. MAIN MENU
Push and release the down arrow button to CHANGE ENGINE OIL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
scroll downward through the main menu and
All of the following items are accessed by pressing
submenus. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
the OK button.
 OK Button indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message
will display in the instrument cluster display. The Home
Push the OK button to access/select the infor- engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
mation screens or submenu screens of a main Speedometer Graph
based, which means the engine oil change interval
menu item. Push and hold the OK button for This uses the round bar graph filling to visually
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
one second to reset displayed/selected represent current speed. When a speed control
driving style.
features that can be reset. system is active, the graph also provides visual
Unless reset, this message will continue to display cues for the different states of that particular
NOTE: each time you turn the ignition switch to the speed control system.
For vehicles with a 3.5 inch instrument cluster ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
display, press the OK button to toggle between temporarily, push and release the OK button. Trip
mph or km/h. To reset the oil change indicator system (after Vehicles with 7 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
For Screen Setup: performing the scheduled maintenance), refer Access to trip information is available through the
 OK button allows user to enter menu and to the following procedure. following submenus.
submenus. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position  Instant Consumption – Shows the instant
 Within each submenu layer, the up and (do not start the engine). consumption in real time (MPG or L/100 km or
down arrow buttons will allow the user to 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three km/L).
select the item of interest. times, within 10 seconds.  Average Consumption – Shows the average
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
 Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) Driver Assist This menu will display the audio source
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. information, including the Song name, Artist name,
The Driver Assist systems are electronic aids
 Average Speed – Shows the average speed and audio source with an accompanying graphic.
designed to offer the driver help in certain driving
(MPH or KM/H) of Trip A or Trip B since the last situations Ú page 79 Phone
reset.
Vehicle Info This menu displays the current status of a phone
 Travel Time – Shows the total elapsed time of connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth®.
Tire Pressure (TPMS)
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. If no phone is connected, the menu will not
TPMS shows the tire status with the numeric 3
Hold the OK button to reset feature information. function when the OK button is pushed. Otherwise,
pressure and the unit for each tire, when low
NOTE: if a phone is connected, push the OK button to
pressure is detected an alert mess and a yellow
During the reset the instruction line disappears enter the menu. The following items will display:
telltale will pop-up in the instrument cluster display
and a bar graph appears to indicate the resetting Ú page 151.  Recent calls: displays a list of the last 10 calls.
status; when the bar graph is full the reset is  SMS reader: displays the last 10 text messages
Oil Temperature
complete. and if they are read or unread.
A bar graph in your instrument cluster display will
Vehicles with 3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
show your current temperature of your oil.  Favorite numbers: displays a maximum of
 Instant Information – Shows the instantaneous 10 favorite numbers.
Battery Voltage
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) and
distance to empty (mi or km). A bar graph in your instrument cluster display will Navigation
show your current battery voltage. If activated, this menu item will display navigation
 Trip A – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav-
eled, the total elapsed time of travel, average Service Information – If Equipped status and directions.
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L), and This feature can provide information on scheduled Messages
the average speed (MPH or KM/H). maintenance. It will display either “Service This menu item allows you to display the
 Trip B – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav- Distance” or “Service Days” Ú page 198. information messages/malfunction stored.
eled, the total elapsed time of travel, average Audio The background color of the display varies
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L), and according to the priorities of the failure:
the average speed (MPH or KM/H). Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is  Failed Messages with low priority display in yellow.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.  Failed Messages with high priority display in red.
VEHICLE SETTINGS Display – If Equipped Security – If Equipped

By selecting the item “Display,” you can access the By selecting the item “Security” you can make the
NOTE:
following settings using the arrows on the steering following adjustments (if equipped):
Some items may be displayed and managed
wheel:  Passenger Airbag: Front passenger air bag may
through the Uconnect system. This may vary
according to your vehicle equipment. If equipped,  Screen Setup be enabled or disabled
the following menu/submenu items are available  Center  Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit,
in the cluster display. which the driver is notified through a visual and
• Audio Info
NOTE: acoustic signaling (display of a message and a
• Phone Info symbol on the display)
If equipped, some customer programmable
• Time
features will display in the Uconnect system  Seat Belt Reminder: This function is only view-
Ú page 120. • Outside Temp able when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system
This menu allows you to change the settings for the • Date is active
following:  Bottom Right  Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the
 Display • Time Hill Start Assist system
 Security • Odometer Safety And Assistance – If Equipped
 Safety And Assistance • Outside Temp By selecting the item “Safety & Assistance” you
• Date can make the following adjustments
 Vehicle Shut Off
 Reset Trip B  Warning Buzzer Volume: Off/Low/Medium/High
 Phone repetition Vehicle Shut Off – If Equipped

 Navigation repetition By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”, you can
turn off the engine from the instrument cluster.
 Off
This feature is available in the event of a Keyless
 Map Ignition system failure, and will display instructions
 Pictogram for turning off the engine via the instrument cluster
display controls.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Brake Warning Light NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp
This warning light monitors various brake
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
functions, including brake fluid level and
instrument panel together with a dedicated message conditions. The vehicle should have service
parking brake application. If the brake
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
light turns on it may indicate that the
indications are indicative and precautionary and as If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or necessary.
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Brake System reservoir. 3
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all WARNING!
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in If the light remains on when the parking brake has
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
display first if applicable. The system check menu may mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
appear different based upon equipment options and a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle.
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and that a problem with the Brake Booster has been You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
may not appear. detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / checked immediately.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
RED WARNING LIGHTS case, the light will remain on until the condition has Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
Air Bag Warning Light (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in may be felt during each stop. with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking system is required.
light is either not on during startup, stays on,
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay
in the master cylinder has dropped below a should then turn off unless the parking brake is
on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
specified level. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN Warning Light running, immediate service is required and you
position. may experience reduced performance, an
This warning light will turn on when elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
NOTE: there's a fault with the EPS system
This light shows only that the parking brake is vehicle may require towing. The light will come
Ú page 78. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application. MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a
WARNING! bulb check. If the light does not come on during
Battery Charge Warning Light starting, have the system checked by an
This warning light will illuminate when the Continued operation with reduced assist could authorized dealer.
battery is not charging properly. If it stays pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible. Engine Temperature Warning Light
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging This light warns of an overheated engine
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as condition. If the engine coolant
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
possible. temperature is too high, this indicator will
Light illuminate and a single chime will sound.
This indicates a possible problem with the
This warning light will illuminate to inform of If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
electrical system or a related component.
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
Door Open Warning Light is detected while the vehicle is running, the on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
This indicator will illuminate when one or light will either stay on or flash depending on and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does
more door(s) are not fully closed. A pop-up the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
appears on the instrument cluster display vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the and call for service Ú page 194.
showing which door is open. transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the Hood Open Warning Light
NOTE: vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; The telltale turns on when the hood is not
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon properly closed. Along with the icon, an
will also be a single chime. as possible. image of the vehicle with an open hood
cap appears on the display.
Close the hood properly.
Rear Cargo Door Open Warning Light - Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
If Equipped When the ignition is first placed in the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
This warning light will illuminate when the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime Warning Light — If Equipped
rear cargo door is open.
will sound and the light will turn on. When This warning light will illuminate to
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt indicate a fault in the ACC system.
NOTE: remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light Contact a local authorized dealer for
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately will flash or remain on continuously and a chime service Ú page 82.
15 seconds when the vehicle security system is 3
will sound Ú page 154.
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
is disarmed. Transmission Fault Warning Light Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light This light will illuminate (together with a This light monitors the ABS. The light will
message in the instrument cluster display turn on when the ignition is placed in the
This warning light will illuminate to and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the may stay on for as long as four seconds.
light turns on while driving, stop the message remains after restarting the engine.
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. Vehicle Security Warning Light — driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
A chime will sound when this light turns on. If Equipped system is not functioning and service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is This light will flash at a fast rate for
continue to operate normally if the brake warning
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
light is not on.
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be security system is arming, and then will flash
checked under the hood. slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light
does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- Generic Warning Light
Indicator Light cator Light come on momentarily each time
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR
This telltale will illuminate when the if any of the following conditions occur:
(ACC/ON/RUN) position.
vehicle security system has detected an Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure,
attempt to break into the vehicle.  Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), the ESC system will be on, intervention or fail, Parking Sensor Failure,
NOTE: even if it was turned off previously. Dynamic Steering Torque System Failure.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking The telltale will remain on fixed in case of swivel
if a problem with the system is detected. This sounds when it is active. This is normal; the seat failure and on blinking in case of Air Bag
condition will result in the engine being shut off sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. Warning Light Failure. Contact an authorized
after two seconds.  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an dealer immediately for service.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning ESC event. Low Fuel Warning Light
Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF When the fuel level reaches the low
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument Warning Light threshold, this light will turn on and
cluster will come on when the ignition is remain on until fuel is added.
This light indicates the ESC is off.
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position, and when ESC is activated.
It should turn off with the engine running. If the ESC Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC was turned off previously.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL) Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

WARNING!
Warning Light Light — If Equipped
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator This warning light will illuminate to
above, can reach higher temperatures than in
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard indicate a fault in the FCW System.
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
Diagnostic System called OBD II that Contact an authorized dealer for service.
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
monitors engine and automatic
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could Service Required/Call For Service Warning
transmission control systems. This warning light
result in death or serious injury to the driver, Light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
occupants or others. 3
position before engine start. If the bulb does not This warning light will illuminate when
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF service is needed. A pop-up will appear in
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. the display to signal the need for service.
CAUTION! Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator possible.
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
the light stays on through several typical driving control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic Warning Light
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing. converter damage and power loss will soon occur. The warning light switches on and a message
Immediate service is required. is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to is lower than the recommended value and/
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In
loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. Service Active Lane Management Warning these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer Light — If Equipped consumption may not be guaranteed.
as soon as possible if this occurs.
This warning light will illuminate when the Should one or more tires be in the condition
Active Lane Management system is not mentioned above, the display will show the
operating and requires service. Please indications corresponding to each tire.
see an authorized dealer.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

WARNING! proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The TPMS has been optimized for the original
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the even if underinflation has not reached the level to equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure warning have been established for the tire size
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using telltale. equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS operation or sensor damage may result when using
authorized dealer as soon as possible. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
flash for approximately one minute and then remain sensor to become inoperable. After using an
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator your sensor function checked.
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
inflation pressure for those tires. or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
including the installation of replacement or alternate
If Equipped
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire This light illuminates when there is a
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is failure with the tow hook. Contact an
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low authorized dealer for service.
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
continue to function properly.
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Exterior Lights Failure Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn The telltale will illuminate to indicate a
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
of a high transmission fluid temperature. failure on the following lights: Daytime
This may occur with strenuous usage Indicator Light — If Equipped Running Lights (DRLs) / parking lights /
such as trailer towing. If this light turns This indicator light will illuminate when trailer turn signal indicators (if present) /
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or you switch FCW off or when driving trailer lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or conditions obscure the sensor with snow, indicators / rear fog light / reversing light / brake
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light heavy rain, or sun. lights / license plate lights. 3
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown
protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical
WARNING! This indicator light will illuminate when
connection. Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse.
TOW/HAUL mode is selected Ú page 110.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Contact an authorized dealer.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, Keyless System Failure Light
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust This light will illuminate if there is a fuel
The telltale will illuminate in the event of cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take
components and cause a fire. keyless system failure. it to an authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION! GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
Continuous driving with the Transmission Rain Sensor Failure Light
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage failure of the automatic windshield wiper. If Equipped
or transmission failure. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as The Active Lane Management indicator light
possible. illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs Ú page 102.
Active Speed Limiter Set Indicator Light — Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument This indicator light will illuminate when
High Beam Indicator Light
Cluster the front fog lights are on Ú page 32.
This indicator light will illuminate to
This indicator light will illuminate when indicate that the high beam headlights
the Active Speed Limiter is on and set to Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light are on. With the low beams activated,
a specific speed Ú page 79. push the multifunction lever forward
This indicator light will illuminate when
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — the parking lights or headlights are (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
If Equipped turned on Ú page 32. beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
This indicator shows that the automatic Turn Signal Indicator/Hazard Warning beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
high beam headlights are on Ú page 32. Lights toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
The turn signal arrows will flash pass” scenario.
Cruise Control Indicator Light — independently when left or right turn
WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS
If Equipped signals are selected. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
This indicator light will illuminate when the moved down (left) or up (right).
cruise control is activated Ú page 80. Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
Pressing the Hazard Warning Flashers button will
This will display when the ACC is set and
illuminate both right and left turn signal arrows
NOTE: a vehicle in front is detected Ú page 82.
simultaneously Ú page 176.
There will be no change in the indicator light when
NOTE:
the desired speed is set.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light — Speed Warning Indicator Light — If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
If Equipped If Equipped system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
When the Active Lane Management When Set Speed Warning is turned on, information to assist your service technician in
system is ON, but not armed, the Active the speed warning telltale will illuminate making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
Lane Management indicator light in the instrument cluster with a number be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
illuminates solid white. This occurs when matching the set speed. When the set dealer for service as soon as possible.
only left, right, or neither lane line has been speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the with pop-up message of speed warning exceeded. CAUTION! 3
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
instrument cluster display Ú page 55.
detected lane line Ú page 102. further damage to the emission control
NOTE: system. It could also affect fuel economy and
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator The number “55” is only an example of a speed driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
Light — If Equipped With A Premium that can be set. before any emissions tests can be performed.
Instrument Cluster  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
This light will illuminate when the Active ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II running, severe catalytic converter damage
Speed Limiter has been turned on, but Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
not set Ú page 79. Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors service is required.
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a a normal bulb check.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
connection port to allow access to information 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
related to the performance of your emissions things will happen:
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
controls. Authorized service technicians may need vehicle registration.
to access this information to assist with the  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection and then return to being fully illuminated until you
emissions system Ú page 119. Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
WARNING! functioning and is not on when the ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is station.
 ONLY an authorized service technician should ready for testing.
connect equipment to the OBD II connection  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
service your vehicle. was recently serviced, recently had a depleted position or start the engine. This means that
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the system should be determined not ready for the I/M can proceed to the I/M station.
OBD II connection port, such as a test, your vehicle may fail the test.
driver-behavior tracking device, it may: If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
 Be possible that vehicle systems, which you can use prior to going to the test station. vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
including safety related systems, could be To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could you must do the following: more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
occur that may result in an accident 1. Switch the ignition to the ON position, but do in order for your OBD II system to update. A
involving serious injury or death. not crank or start the engine. recheck with the above test routine may then
 Access, or allow others to access, infor- NOTE: indicate that the system is now ready.
mation stored in your vehicle systems, If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
including personal information. start this test over.
69
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, of PARK.
(B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
your seat belts. NORMAL STARTING use of an externally powered electric engine block
NOTE: heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
WARNING! recommended.
Normal starting of either a cold or warm engine is
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with obtained without pumping or pressing the accel- 4
access to an unlocked vehicle. erator pedal.
EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended Proceed as follows: NOTE:
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child 1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position. has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
Children should be warned not to touch the 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- the battery to ensure a full battery charge
accelerator.
sion gear selector. during the crank cycle.
3. Press the START/STOP ignition button and
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle 2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
(or in a location accessible to children). A child release it when the engine starts.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition
could operate power windows, other controls, 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
in the OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds
or move the vehicle. place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
before attempting to restart the engine.
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,
then repeat the “Extended Park Starting”
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TIP START F EATURE procedure.
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL Do not press the accelerator. Press briefly the 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
position before you can start the engine. Press the START/STOP ignition button and release it. The starter allow the starter to cool for at least
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear. motor will continue to run but will automatically 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
disengage when the engine is running.
70 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! WARNING! WARNING!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a booster cables may be used to obtain a start cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. from a booster battery or the battery in electrical cord could cause electrocution.
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 192.
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the A long break-in period is not required for the engine
“Normal Starting” procedure, and the vehicle has not CAUTION! and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
experienced an extended park condition, it may be To prevent damage to the starter, do not vehicle.
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the continuously crank the engine for more than Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
than 10 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in before trying again. speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the desirable.
ON/RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. AFTER S TARTING While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
WARNING!
will decrease as the engine warms up. gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
the throttle body air inlet opening in an ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. The engine block heater warms the engine, and Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the climate conditions under which vehicle operations
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. quality grades see Ú page 251.
matic transmission cannot be started this
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic CAUTION!
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
converter and once the engine has started,
on the engine. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
NOTE: If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the

A new engine may consume some oil during its first parking brake will automatically engage whenever
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
should be considered a normal part of the break-in on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often is engaging.
during the break-in period. Add oil as required. The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
PARKING BRAKE REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
ELECTRIC P ARK B RAKE (EPB) Electric Park Brake Switch To release the parking brake manually, the ignition 4
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
simple operation, and some additional features switch momentarily. You may hear a slight sound from foot on the brake pedal, then push the parking
that make the parking brake more convenient and the back of the vehicle while the parking brake brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a
useful. engages. Once the park brake is fully engaged, the slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster and an while the parking brake disengages. You may also
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on notice a small amount of movement in the brake
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake, you pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
transmission in PARK. The parking brake can be applied even when the and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways: ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE telltale light will NOTE:
not illuminate, however, it can only be released when When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
 Manually, by applying the parking brake switch. the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake NOTE: and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
feature in the Customer Programmable The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch the parking brake before placing the gear selector
Features section of the Uconnect settings. is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
The parking brake switch is located on the released or applied position. The light will extin- locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel guish upon releasing the switch. the gear selector out of PARK.
(below the headlamp switch).
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute  Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
for the parking brake. Always apply the your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
parking brake fully when parked to guard injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in to slow the vehicle, may cause serious damage
against vehicle movement and possible injury PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll to the brake system. Be sure the parking brake
or damage. and cause damage or injury. is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do
so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
CAUTION! In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
with the parking brake released, a brake system may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. system is required. Do not rely on the parking
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector. If exceptional circumstances should make it Auto Park Brake
necessary to engage the parking brake while the The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
or in a location accessible to children, and do
the EPB switch for as long as engagement is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate, placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop disabled by customer selection through the
A child could operate power windows, other
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while Customer Programmable Features section of the
controls, or move the vehicle.
the vehicle remains in motion. Uconnect Settings Ú page 130.
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
before driving; failure to do so can lead to in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
brake failure and a collision. brought to a complete stop using the parking position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
(Continued) brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
SafeHold actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done

easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu-based WARNING!
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
while the ignition is in ON/RUN. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
service.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
the following conditions are met: the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
in order to be activated:
 The vehicle is at a standstill. quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
 The vehicle must be at a standstill. control of the vehicle and hit someone or
 There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
 The parking brake must be unapplied. something. Only shift into gear when the
and accelerator pedal. engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly 4
 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
 The seat belt is unbuckled. pressing the brake pedal.
While in Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
 The driver door is open.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
continuously while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
When brake service work is complete, the following vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once
steps must be followed to reset the park brake the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
system to normal operation: always come to a complete stop, then apply
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and  Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. the parking brake, shift the transmission into
back to ON again.  Press the brake pedal with moderate force. PARK, and turn the ignition off. When the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, the transmission is
Brake Service Mode  Apply the EPB Switch.
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an unwanted movement.
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs WARNING!
for which you have the knowledge and the right  When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
You can be badly injured working on or around a
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
Mode during brake service. key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
which you have the knowledge and the right
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary equipment. If you have any doubt about your (Continued)
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake (EPB) to a competent mechanic.
system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB
WARNING!
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK 9-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION
(K EYLESS VEHICLE) The transmission gear position display (located in
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in gear range. You must press the brake pedal to
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF move the gear selector out of PARK. To drive, move
others could be seriously or fatally injured. position. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the
Children should be warned not to touch the whenever the ignition is in the OFF position. DRIVE position.
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- The electronically controlled transmission provides a
sion gear selector. BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
(or in a location accessible to children), and do This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi- transmission gear selector in PARK unless the hundred miles (kilometers).
tion. A child could operate power windows, brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
other controls, or move the vehicle. PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN
position (engine running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed. This vehicle is equipped
CAUTION! with an additional lock system that holds the
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after transmission gear selector in NEUTRAL (if vehicle
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. speed is approximately 0 mph (0 km/h). To shift
the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE the brake
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, pedal must be pressed.
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
NOTE:
Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your the transmission gear selector from being moved Gear Selector
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. out of the PARK position. To shift the transmission
out of the PARK position the first time after Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
cranking is allowed, ensure swivel seats are locked the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
in the forward facing position. stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, PARK (P)

REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by
Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
locking the transmission. The engine can be
can be made using the ERS shift control. Moving others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
the gear selector into the ERS “-”/”+” position move the transmission gear selector out of
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
(beside the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
displays the current gear in the instrument cluster, sure the transmission is in PARK before
and prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake exiting the vehicle.
In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector forward “-” before shifting the transmission to PARK,
or rearward “+” will change the highest available otherwise the load on the transmission locking  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
gear Ú page 77. mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn complete stop before shifting to PARK, and 4
NOTE: the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill verify that the transmission gear position indi-
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade. cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
forward) it is probably in the ERS “+”/”-” position When exiting the vehicle, always:
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
(beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the  Apply the parking brake. indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in  Shift the transmission into PARK.
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to  Turn the engine off. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.  Remove the key fob from the vehicle. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
Gear Ranges quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
WARNING!
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting control of the vehicle and hit someone or
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.  Never use the PARK position as a substitute something. Only shift into gear when the
for the parking brake. Always apply the engine is idling normally (or stopped) and your
NOTE: parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
guard against vehicle movement and possible
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler- injury or damage. (Continued)
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold. (Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING! that you have engaged the transmission into the
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure PARK position:
prolonged periods with the engine running.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,  When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear The engine may be started in this range. Apply the
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is selector all the way forward and to the left until parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
running or the propulsion system is active. Before it stops and is fully seated. if you must exit the vehicle.
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
 Look at the transmission gear position display
then apply the parking brake, shift the transmis- WARNING!
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
sion into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission  With the brake pedal released, verify that the Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against gear selector will not move out of PARK. ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
unwanted movement. practices that limit your response to changing
CAUTION! traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure of the vehicle and have a collision.
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the  Before moving the transmission gear selector
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with CAUTION!
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- could result. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
can cause severe transmission damage.
others could be seriously or fatally injured. PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
Children should be warned not to touch the this can damage the drivetrain. For Recreational Towing Ú page 116.
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 196.
sion gear selector. REVERSE (R)
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle This range is for moving the vehicle backward. DRIVE (D)
(or in a location accessible to children), and do Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. This range should be used for most city and
to a complete stop.
A child could operate power windows, other highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
controls, or move the vehicle. and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading be illuminated. Transmission Limp Home Mode
The ERS shift control allows the driver to
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized
select the max gear limit. For example, if you
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select dealer for service without damaging the
set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range transmission.
transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear, but
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear In the event of a momentary problem, the will shift through the lower gears normally.
range Ú page 77. Under these conditions, using a transmission can be reset to regain all forward
lower gear range will improve performance and You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
gears by performing the following steps:
extend transmission life by reducing excessive any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
shifting and heat buildup. 1. Stop the vehicle. DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. automatically, shifting between all available gears.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position 4
may be modified depending on engine and 3. Turn the ignition OFF.
(beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the
transmission temperature as well as vehicle 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that
speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the
5. Restart the engine. gear as the max gear limit. Once in ERS mode,
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
moving the gear selector forward “-” or rearward
efficiency. During extremely cold temperatures 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
“+” will change the max gear limit.
(-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be problem is no longer detected, the
limited to THIRD gear only. Normal operation will transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE:
resume once the transmission temperature has The transmission will still continue to use the
risen to a suitable level. NOTE: optimal highest gear, for the current driving condi-
Even if the transmission can be reset, we tions, within the selected gear range limit.
Transmission Limp Home Mode recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector
Transmission function is monitored electronically your earliest possible convenience. An authorized to the DRIVE position.
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
that could result in transmission damage, condition of your transmission. If the transmission WARNING!
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
mode, the transmission remains in THIRD gear required. Do not downshift for additional engine braking
regardless of which forward gear is selected. on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
Instrument
Cluster 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D
Display
Actual
Gear(s) 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–7 1–8 1–9 1–9
Allowed
NOTE: If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be If the steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
To select the proper gear position for maximum pushed each time the engine is started. POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
selector into the ERS position, then tap it forward POWER STEERING indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
“-” repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The trans- dealer for service Ú page 55.
mission will shift to the range from which the The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of NOTE:
vehicle can best be slowed down.
maneuverability. The power steering system  Even if the power steering system is no longer
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode adapts to different driving conditions. operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the Under these conditions there will be a substantial
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. increase in steering effort, especially at low
occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering speeds and during parking maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and assistance.  If the condition persists, see an authorized
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or dealer for service.
If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed,
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
and the transmission will automatically downshift (for
indicates an over temperature condition in the
engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL moments until the icon and message turn off
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a Ú page 55.
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER — IF EQUIPPED After the Active Speed Limiter on/off button has
been pushed, you must press the SET (+) or SET (–)
The feature will remain disabled until the vehicle
speed drops below the set Active Speed Limiter
The Active Speed Limiter button is positioned on button to set the target speed (or RES button when value, where it will reactivate automatically.
the right side of the steering wheel. there is already a previously set target).
DEACTIVATION
Push the SET (+) or SET (–) button to raise and
lower the target speed to the desired value. To turn off Active Speed Limiter, push the Active Speed
Pushing and holding down the SET (+) or SET (–) Limiter button on the right side of the steering wheel. A
button will increase/decrease the speed value by message will appear in the instrument cluster display to
increments of 5 mph (5 km/h). confirm that the feature has been turned off. You can
Each time that Active Speed Limiter is activated, it also deactivate Active Speed Limiter by pressing the
will be set to the last programmed value from the CANC button. In this case, the system is not completely 4
previous activation. turned off, and the driver can reactivate the Active
Speed Limiter by pressing the RES button.
NOTE:
Active Speed Limiter Button

The Cruise Control (if equipped) and Adaptive Cruise
Control (if equipped) systems will be unavailable while
INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST (ISA) —
This feature allows you to program the maximum
the Active Speed Limiter is in use. IF EQUIPPED
speed of travel for your vehicle. EXCEEDING THE S ET SPEED The Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) system
combines the Active Speed Limiter and
NOTE: By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) systems to
The Active Speed Limiter can be set with the programmed maximum speed can be exceeded automatically adjust the maximum speed
vehicle stationary or in motion. while the device is active. of the vehicle based on detected traffic signs.
ACTIVATION In the event that the Active Speed Limiter set value
is exceeded manually with a driver acceleration, an
To activate the feature, push the Active Speed audible indicator will sound. The indicator light will
Limiter button located on the right side of the rapidly flash, and a message will appear in the
steering wheel. A message will appear along with instrument cluster display.
an indicator light in the instrument cluster display
to signal that Active Speed Limiter has been
activated.
ACTIVATION NOTE:
The Cruise Control (if equipped) and Adaptive
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the feature, make sure the Traffic Sign Cruise Control (if equipped) systems will be Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Assist (TSA) system is enabled within Uconnect unavailable while the ISA system is in use. Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
Settings Ú page 120, then push the Active Speed (ACC) system:
Limiter button located on the right side of the EXCEEDING THE S ET SPEED  Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
steering wheel. The message “Ready” will appear
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the constant preset speed.
along with a white indicator light in the instrument
maximum set speed can be exceeded while the  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
cluster display to signal that the system has been
system is active. vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
activated.
When the maximum set speed is exceeded, the tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
While the system is in the “Ready” state, the driver
green indicator light will blink and the instrument NOTE:
must press the SET (+), SET (–), or RES button to
cluster display will show an override message for
engage the system. When the system is fully  In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
five seconds, or until the accelerator pedal is
engaged and detects the current speed limit using enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
released.
the TSA system, the message in the instrument detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
cluster display will indicate the new detected DEACTIVATION aware of the feature selected.
speed limit by suggesting the driver to press "RES"  Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
to accept it. To turn off the Intelligent Speed Assist system,
push the Active Speed Limiter button on the right time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
If the detected speed sign is greater then the side of the steering wheel. A message will appear is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
current set speed, an up arrow will be displayed in the instrument cluster display to confirm that the unavailable, and vice versa.
too. If the detected speed sign is lower then the
current set speed, a down arrow will be displayed
feature has been turned off. The Intelligent Speed CRUISE C ONTROL
Assist system can also be deactivated by pressing
instead. If the driver accepts the new suggested the CANC button. In this case, the ISA system is When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
speed sign, the indicator light will change to green. not completely turned off, and the driver can accelerator operations at speeds greater than
Pushing the SET (+) or SET (–) button on the right reactivate the system by pressing the RES button. 25 mph (40 km/h) up to the maximum speed of
of the steering wheel will raise and lower the set 100 mph (160 km/h).
speed to a desired value above or below the set ISA The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
speed. Pushing and holding down the SET (+) or side of the steering wheel.
SET (–) button will increase/decrease the speed
value by increments of 5 mph (5 km/h).
To Activate To Vary The Speed Setting

Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise To Increase or Decrease The Set Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn speed by pushing the SET (+) button or decrease
the system off, push the on/off button a second the speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use. U.S. Speed (mph)
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
WARNING! result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in
Cruise Control Buttons
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
adjustment of 1 mph. 4
1 — SET (+)/Accel system or cause it to go faster than you want. You  If the button is continually pushed, the set
2 — CANC/Cancel could lose control and have an accident. Always speed will continue to adjust until the button is
ensure the system is off when you are not using it. released, then the new set speed will be estab-
3 — SET (-)/Decel
lished.
4 — On/Off
To Set A Desired Speed Metric Speed (km/h)
5 — RES/Resume
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, press the Cruise result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
WARNING! Control SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. subsequent tap of the button results in an
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will adjustment of 1 km/h.
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
operate at the selected speed.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
NOTE: speed will continue to adjust until the button
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could
is released, then the new set speed will be
lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
established.
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or
icy, snow-covered or slippery. SET (-) button.
To Accelerate For Passing To Deactivate  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-

tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
While the Cruise Control system is set, press the A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
sion Warning system.
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
set speed. erasing the set speed from memory.  Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS Always be aware of the feature selected
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
The transmission may downshift on hills to memory. Ú page 256.
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) WARNING!
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or convenience provided by Cruise Control while nience system. It is not a substitute for active
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive traveling on highways and major roadways. driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
without Cruise Control. However, it is not a safety system and not designed responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
WARNING! performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
with ACC Ú page 80. importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
system cannot maintain a constant speed. ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
tions. Your complete attention is always
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
required while driving to maintain safe control
and you could lose control and have an accident. constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on radar sensor and a forward facing camera
ings can result in a collision and death or
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you
serious personal injury.
slippery. to maintain a set speed.
 The ACC system:
NOTE:
To Resume Speed  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC  Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
exceed the original set speed) automatically to stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
button and release. Resume can be used at any
maintain a preset following distance, while disabled vehicle).
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h). matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. (Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

WARNING!
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi- operate the ACC system.
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
 Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped) 4
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa- 1 — Distance Setting Button
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
 When entering a turn lane or highway 3 — CANC/Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped)
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are 4 — Active Speed Limiter Button
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have 1 — Distance Increase Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
steep uphill or downhill slopes. 2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
 When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. 3 — CANC/Cancel
7 — RES/Resume
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving
4 — Distance Decrease Button
8 — SET (-)/Decel
at a constant speed. 5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The instrument cluster display will return to the last To Activate/Deactivate
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
The instrument cluster display will show the Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
display activity.
current ACC system settings. The information it (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
displays depends on ACC system status. Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off The minimum set speed for the ACC system is Then proceed to setting the desired speed as
button until one of the following appears in the 20 mph (32 km/h). described in the next section.
instrument cluster display: When the system is turned on and in the ready To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control Off state, the instrument cluster display will read Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
“ACC Ready.” At this time, the system will turn off and the
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” When the system is off, the instrument cluster display Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” The system will also turn
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” off during any of the conditions listed in “To Turn
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed NOTE: Off” Ú page 85.
setting has not been selected, the display will read You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”  When the brakes are applied WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Set  When the parking brake is applied Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,  When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
the set speed will show in the instrument cluster REVERSE or NEUTRAL
go faster than you want. You could lose control
display.  When the vehicle speed is below the minimum and have a collision. Always leave the system off
The ACC screen may display once again if any of speed range when you are not using it.
the following ACC activity occurs:  When the brakes are overheated
 System Cancel  When there is a stationary vehicle in front of To Set A Desired Speed
 Driver Override your vehicle in close proximity
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
 System Off push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
 ACC Proximity Warning release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
 ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE: NOTE:  The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates

Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
ACC enabled. To change between the different cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate position
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the Adap-  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. tive cruise control light will flash and, if a target
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off System (ESC/TCS) activates
is detected by the sensor, the target graphics
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed will also flash.  The vehicle parking brake is applied
Speed Cruise Control mode.  The braking temperature exceeds normal range
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not (overheated)
WARNING!
be controlling the distance between your vehicle To Turn Off
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will 4
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
only be determined by the position of the accel-
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does memory if:
erator pedal.
not activate and no alarm will sound even if you  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither Desired Driving Speed Through A Detected is pushed
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the Speed Sign  The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system allows the pushed
to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle driver to set the detected speed sign Ú page 91 as
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position
and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which the new desired driving speed. The Traffic Sign
mode is selected. Assist (TSA) system will suggest the new detected To Resume
speed sign on the cluster and then the driver can If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below decide to confirm the speed sign capturing by (resume) button and remove your foot from the
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to pressing the RES (resume) button. accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
20 mph (32 km/h). To Cancel will show the last set speed.
NOTE: The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below Speed Cruise Control systems: (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
20 mph (32 km/h). being used.
 The brake pedal is applied
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
 The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be (0 km/h) when ACC is active.
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)  The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
 If your vehicle is at standstill longer than two  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
seconds, the driver will either have to push the result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator subsequent tap of the button results in an after two seconds the driver will either have to
pedal to reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control adjustment of 1 mph. push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
(ACC) to the existing set speed. accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed existing set speed.
 ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. the button is released. The new set speed is  The ACC system maintains set speed when
reflected in the instrument cluster display. driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
WARNING! speed change on moderate hills is normal.
Metric Speed (km/h) In addition, downshifting may occur while
The Resume function should only be used if traffic  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each normal operation and necessary to maintain set
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and subsequent tap of the button results in an speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the
road conditions could cause the vehicle to adjustment of 1 km/h. ACC system will cancel if the braking tempera-
accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe ture exceeds normal range (overheated).
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury. will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments Setting The Following Distance In ACC
until the button is released. The new set speed is
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
by varying the distance setting between four bars
To Vary The Speed Setting NOTE: (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed When you override and push the SET (+) button or one bar (short). Using this distance setting and
After setting a speed, you can increase the set SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed of the vehicle. distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
speed by pushing the SET (-) button. When ACC Is Active setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: Overtake Aid
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
the set speed. engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
view of the sensor. set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
 The distance setting is changed.
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active
 The system disengages Ú page 84. when passing on the left hand side.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; ACC Operation At Stop
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
Distance Settings manually, if necessary. In the event that the ACC system brings your 4
vehicle to a standstill while following a vehicle in
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) NOTE: front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) system applies the brakes. vehicle will resume motion without the need for
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC any driver action.
predicts that its maximum braking level is not If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
To adjust the distance setting, push the Distance occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
Setting Button and release. Each time the button is the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
(longer). Once the longest setting is reached, if the the ACC to the existing set speed.
force.
button is pushed again it will be set to the shortest NOTE:
setting available. NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand-
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster still for approximately three consecutive minutes,
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same display is a warning for the driver to take action
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward system will be cancelled.
ACC Set With Target Detected Light. The system Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
will then adjust vehicle speed automatically to While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if
autonomously.
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door
set speed. is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
NOTE: NOTE:
WARNING! If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”  If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control can Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
must ensure that there are no pedestrians, be still enabled. than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
collision and death or serious personal injury. or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located  Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
Display Warnings And Maintenance To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
important to note the following maintenance and inhibit ACC operation.
RADAR SENSOR UNAVAILABILITY WARNING items:
“ACC LIMITED FUNCTIONALITY CAMERA
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
warning will display and a chime will sound when sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
BLOCKED” WARNING
conditions temporarily limit system performance. damage the sensor lens. The “ACC Limited Functionality Camera Blocked”
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,  Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
warning will display and a chime will sound when
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc- conditions temporarily limit system performance.
may also become temporarily blinded due to tion or failure and require a sensor realignment. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
 If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is system may also become temporarily blinded due
cases, the instrument cluster display will display damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
the above message and the system will deactivate. to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
dealer for service. windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
This message can sometimes be displayed while  Do not attach or install any accessories near the cases, the instrument cluster display will read
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, sensor, including transparent material or after- “ACC Limited Functionality Camera Blocked” and
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC the system will have degraded performance.
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. system failure or malfunction.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not This message can sometimes be displayed while
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this When the condition that deactivated the system is driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC
warning may temporarily occur. no longer present, the system will return to the system will recover after the vehicle has left these
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is
function by simply reactivating it. not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver Precautions While Driving With ACC TURNS AND BENDS
should examine the windshield and the camera
In certain driving situations, ACC may have When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
located on the back side of the inside rearview
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake system may increase or decrease the vehicle
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
obstruction.
and may need to intervene. The following are Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will
When the condition that created limited examples of these types of situations: resume your original set speed. This is a part of
functionality is no longer present, the system will normal ACC system functionality.
return to full functionality. TOWING A TRAILER
NOTE:
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC. On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Camera Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once OFFSET DRIVING USING ACC ON HILLS 4
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that ACC performance may be limited when driving on
obstruction, have the windshield and forward is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer. merging in from a side lane. There may not be depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
SERVICE ACC WARNING vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster which can cause your vehicle to brake or
display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or accelerate unexpectedly.
“Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
ACC Hill Example
Offset Driving Condition Example

LANE CHANGING NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer ACC does not react to stationary objects or
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected until they have moved fully into the lane. situations where the vehicle you are following exits
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC ahead. your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
system to take action. ACC may not detect a stationary object as it did not previously detect
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing to apply the brakes if necessary.
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example

TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION TSA Off

When the TSA system is turned off, the system will
IF EQUIPPED The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within
the Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver
not show any traffic signs (unless selected in the
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera HOME screen, which will show detected speed
Assistance menu. System ON is signaled by road
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data limit signs), and no alerts will be issued to the
signs shown on the instrument cluster display.
when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to driver.
detect recognizable road signs such as:
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will I NDICATIONS ON THE D ISPLAY
 Speed limits be displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
 School zones screen. cluster display, and can display any combination of
 No passing zones TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and 4
NOTE: supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs)
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that depending on what information is available.
 The TSA system will automatically display the are available through the Uconnect system.
road sign detected in the unit of measurement When a newly detected speed limit is higher than
Visual the current speed limit, the display will update
(mph or km/h) selected within Uconnect
Settings or within the instrument cluster display. When Visual is selected, the system will alert the along with an “up” arrow.
driver when the current speed of the vehicle When a newly detected speed limit is lower than
 If no speed limit signs are detected, the system
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a the current speed limit, the display will update
will revert to the speed limit signs that are
graphic in the instrument cluster display. along with a “down” arrow.
stored in the Navigation system.
Visual + Chime
 The system always checks the traffic signs indi-
cating the current speed limit signs. The system When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will
is able to recognize and display up to two alert the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
different road signs in the instrument cluster exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a
display. graphic in the instrument cluster display, and by
sounding an audible alert. The audible alert will last
for 10 seconds, and the visual alert will remain on as
long as the vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
 Rain
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
 Snow
seconds.
 Fog
IF EQUIPPED
Speed Limit Exceeded OPERATION
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined
speed limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and
on the instrument cluster display will show a red centers the vehicle in the driving lane while
outline to alert the driver. traveling at speeds up to 93 mph (150 km/h).
WARNING! Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long
as the set distance between your vehicle and the
To prevent serious injury or death: vehicle in front is maintained. ADA will also keep
 Always remain alert and be ready to take your vehicle centered between the lane lines, and
Traffic Signs Recognized control of the vehicle in the event that the monitor for other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
Active Driving Assist system disables. ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
monitor driver attentiveness. ADA requires the
Information (School Zone)  Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
driver’s hands on the steering wheel at all times.
2 — No Passing Zone Detected when the Active Driving Assist system is acti-
vated.
3 — Next Speed Limit Detected
 Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along  Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
with a newly detected speed limit indicating (e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-
special circumstances the driver should be aware fere with the hand detection sensors.
of. Available supplemental information includes:
 School
 Construction
WARNING! TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING A SSIST O N 2. If ACC was active and engaged before pushing the
ADA on/off button, ACC will remain engaged and
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a
OR OFF ADA will become enabled and then engaged (once
convenience system. It is not a substitute for active all other conditions are met).
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s 3. If ACC was not enabled before pushing the ADA
responsibility to be attentive of road traffic, weather on/off button, push the SET (+) button or the
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle SET (-) button and release when the desired
ahead, position in the lane compared to other driving speed is shown in the instrument
vehicles, and brake operation to ensure safe cluster display.
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by
Your complete attention is always required while
pushing the Distance Setting button. 4
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a When all system conditions are met as described
collision and death or serious personal injury. in “System Engagement Conditions” in the next
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist system: section, the system will engage and the steering
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, wheel image in the display will change to green.
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
proceed as follows:
sleet, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
construction zones). 1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
located on the right side of the steering
 When entering a highway off ramp, when wheel. The steering wheel image will display
driving on roads that are icy, snow covered, or grey in the instrument cluster display until the
slippery. system is engaged. If ACC was previously
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving. turned off, pushing this button will activate
just the lane centering feature of the ADA
system. Push the ACC button to activate both
ACC and ADA Systems.
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)

NOTE: NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel  Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button
image, the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster will turn the system off. All other deactivation
display will also change to green when ADA is conditions will place the system back into the
engaged. “enabled” state with the steering wheel indi-
System Engagement Conditions cator displayed in grey until all engagement
The following conditions must be met before the conditions are met again.
system will engage:  When the system is deactivated, the system
 Active Driving Assist system is enabled status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane
Management will return to its previous state,
 ACC is engaged Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel and ACC will disable.
 System detects visible lane markings
System Deactivation I NDICATIONS ON THE D ISPLAY
 Vehicle is traveling below 93 mph (150 km/h)
The system will be deactivated in any of the
 Vehicle is centered in lane The Active Driving Assist system status can always
following situations:
be viewed in the instrument cluster display, and
 Turn signal is not activated  If the system has detected driver inattentive- status changes are shown by changes in color of
 Vehicle is not in a tight curve ness, and has gone through all escalation warn- the system’s indicator lights.
ings after hands are no longer detected on the
 Driver has hands on steering wheel As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
steering wheel
NOTE: previously described Ú page 92, the system
 If lane markings are no longer detected status indicator lights will change from green, to
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the  If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is yellow, to red, while the steering wheel icon on
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering pushed again (ADA will turn off) the display moves up the screen to the center.
wheel will not satisfy the hands-on condition to The following indicators will change in color as
 If a turn signal is used
engage the system. warnings to the driver escalate:
 If the driver applies torque to the steering wheel
 Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel
 If the vehicle speed exceeds 93 mph (150 km/h) icon in the instrument cluster display)
 If the ACC system is deactivated  Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
 If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
If driver attention is not returned, the system will Subsequently, if the absence of hands on the
deactivate. steering wheel persists, the system will apply an
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off automatic braking intervention to bring the vehicle
to the stop. As soon as the standstill condition is
 ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver. reached, the hazard emergency lights will be
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Grey activated. Then, the system will unlock the doors
 ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the (if previously locked). If the driver will take the
system is not actively providing steering to the control of the vehicle during the Minimum Risk
vehicle. Maneuver by placing the hands on the steering
wheel or pressing the pedal throttle, the system
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green will behave normally and the Minimum Risk
 System is actively steering the vehicle and the
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message 4
Maneuver will be stopped.
system detects driver is attentive. MINIMUM RISK M ANEUVER SYSTEM S TATUS
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
If the driver removes the hands from the steering
 Driver inattentiveness has been detected, Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
wheel, a counter will start in order to display and
warning the driver to place hands on the (green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue a
activate visual and acoustic alerts. When the
steering wheel. steering wheel vibration to accompany these warnings.
hands absence is detected the system will start
The vibration warning (if enabled) will occur if the
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red Minimum Risk Maneuver for bringing the vehicle in
vehicle crosses a lane marker, for example, when
a safe position.
 Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, driving on a tight curve. This feature can be turned on
warning the driver to place hands on the After 23 seconds from the absence of the hands or off within the Uconnect system Ú page 120.
steering wheel. on the steering wheel, the Adaptive System Cruise
Control will apply a brake jerk to warn the driver to
NOTE:
take vehicle control. If, after another 3 seconds the
The driver MUST replace hands on the steering
driver does not take the control of the vehicle, the
wheel and take control of the vehicle when the
system will apply a second brake jerk.
system is deactivated.
SYSTEM O PERATION/LIMITATIONS The Active Driving Assist system may have limited ParkSense will retain the last system state
or reduced functionality when one of the following (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
WARNING! conditions occur: when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
 The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward ParkSense is active when the gear selector is
To prevent serious injury or death: facing camera is damaged, covered, or shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and an
 Always remain alert and be ready to take obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.) obstacle is detected, as long as the system is on.
control of the vehicle in the event that the  Driving near highway toll booths When the gear selector shifted to NEUTRAL or
Active Driving Assist system disables. PARK, the system becomes inactive. When the
NOTE: vehicle is moving forward, the system will remain
 Always keep your hands on the steering wheel If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind- active until the vehicle speed remains below
when the Active Driving Assist system is activated. shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Reducing the
 Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles possible. speed approximately below 9 mph (15 km/h), the
and pay attention to traffic conditions. system will come back active. When the vehicle is
 Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — moving in REVERSE, the system will remain active
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter- IF EQUIPPED as long as the speed remains below the maximum
operating speed of 7 mph (11 km/h). When the
fere with the hand detection sensors.
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual maximum speed limit is exceeded, the system is
and audible indications of the distance between disabled and the ParkSense switch LED with
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT: the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper illuminate. The system will become active again if
 Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles and a detected obstacle when backing up or the vehicle speed reduces below approximately
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). 6 mph (9 km/h).
 Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
For limitations of the system (e.g. during a parking
slower vehicles, construction equipment,
maneuver), see Ú page 101.
pedestrians, or animals
NOTE:
 Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
 The system is designed to assist the driver and
 Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
not to substitute the driver.
 Turn your vehicle
 The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
 Change lanes acceleration and braking and is responsible for
 React to cross traffic controlling the vehicle's movements.
Interaction With Trailer Towing The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
The Park Assist system is automatically the instrument cluster display Ú page 55. It
deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
The system will be automatically activated as soon between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
as the trailer is removed. fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE DISPLAY

The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not The warning display will turn on indicating the
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/ system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and Rear Park Assist Sensors Location been detected. 4
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from system indicates the nearest obstacle. showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 39 inches rear regions based on the object’s distance and
(100 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear The minimum height of a detectable obstacle location relative to the vehicle.
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle
that would clear the underside of the vehicle If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the region, the display will show a single arc in the left
center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches during the parking maneuver.
and/or right rear region and the system will
(60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper. PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
These distances depend on the location, type and object, the display will show the single arc moving
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction. The ParkSense Warning screen will only be closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected in the a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
Uconnect system Ú page 120. continuous.
Front & Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 59–52 inches 52-41 inches 41-34 inches 34-24 inches 24-12 inches
59 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (150-130 cm) (130-105 cm) (105-85 cm) (85-60 cm) (60-30 cm)
(150 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing 4
Audible Alert
None Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle Continuous
Chime
Radio Volume
No Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 39-32 inches 32-24 inches 24-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) 39 inches (100 cm) (100-80 cm) (80-60 cm) (60-30 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets close to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ENABLING A ND D ISABLING P ARKSENSE SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audible tone. ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with SYSTEM
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch When the ParkSense System has detected a faulted
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
panel below the Uconnect display. condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable single chime, and it will show the "PARKSENSE
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
the system, the instrument cluster display UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
Ú page 55 will show the “ParkSense Disabled” UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
message for approximately five seconds. "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings message for five seconds. Under this condition,
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be ParkSense is disabled or requires service. ParkSense will not operate.
selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 120. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
The chime volume settings include low, medium, system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
and high. pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the cluster display make sure the outer surface and
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
LED will be on. the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
state through ignition cycles.
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM system might not detect an obstacle behind or in
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
the ignition. If the message continues to appear Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash false indication that an obstacle is behind or in
see an authorized dealer. soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard front of the fascia/bumper.
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
cluster display, see an authorized dealer. PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST FAILURE USAGE P RECAUTIONS result in the system misinterpreting a close
I NDICATIONS NOTE: object as a sensor problem, causing the
A malfunction of the ParkSense Park Assist  Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE 4
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to REQUIRED” message to be displayed in
sensors or system is indicated, during REVERSE the instrument cluster display.
gear engagement, by the instrument panel keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
warning icon.  Construction equipment, large trucks, and other NOTE:
vibrations could affect the performance of If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
The warning icon is illuminated and a
ParkSense. 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
message is displayed in the instrument
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
cluster display (if equipped) Ú page 59.  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”  There may be a delay in the object detection
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously rate if the object is moving.
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
Failures are indicated immediately if they occur remains off until you turn it on again, even if you  The operation of the rear sensors is automati-
when the system is on. cycle the ignition key. cally deactivated when the trailer's electric plug
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket,
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific while the front sensors stay active and can
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument the radio when it is sounding a tone.
provide acoustic and visual warnings. The rear
cluster display shall indicate that the ParkSense  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking sensors are automatically reactivated when the
Park Assist system is unavailable, without care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors trailer's cable plug is removed.
reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud,
a single sensor fails, the entire system must be dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the
disabled. The system is turned off automatically. system not working properly. The ParkSense
WARNING! CAUTION! LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

 Drivers must be careful when backing up even  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to LANESENSE OPERATION
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully recognize every obstacle, including small obsta-
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before below the sensors will not be detected when they The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera
backing up. You are responsible for safety and are in close proximity. to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
must continue to pay attention to your within the lane boundaries.
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in When both lane markings are detected and the
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
serious injury or death. driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the driver looks over his/her the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball shoulder when using ParkSense. in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel,
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle as well as a visual warning in the instrument
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain
If it is necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch within the lane boundaries.
to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be The driver may manually override the haptic
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia warning by applying force to the steering wheel at
assembly presence in the sensor field of view.
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. any time.
The filtering operation must be performed only by
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount When only a single lane marking is detected and the
an authorized dealer.
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
and shape, giving a false indication that an applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
obstacle is behind the vehicle. warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided. has been approached and is in a lane departure
The LaneSense system will indicate the current situation, the visual warning in the instrument
NOTE: lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
When operating conditions have been met, the cluster display will show the left lane line
display. flashing yellow (on/off). The LaneSense telltale
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
The system will cancel if the driver does not return not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
their hands to the wheel. is solid white.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF 4
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the

LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line)
display. With Yellow Telltale
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
NOTE:
LaneSense button twice (LED turns on).
The LaneSense system operates with similar
NOTE: Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected behavior for a right lane departure when only the
The LaneSense system will retain the last system right lane marking has been detected.
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the  When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the left side.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected For example: If approaching the left side of the For example: If approaching the left side of the
 When the LaneSense system is on and both the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
lane markings have been detected, the system is
"armed" to provide visual warnings in the instru-
ment cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs. The lane lines turn from gray to white and
the LaneSense telltale is solid green.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Yellow Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Telltale Flashing Yellow Telltale
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane has NOTE:
been approached and is in a lane departure situ- The LaneSense system operates with similar
ation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The behavior for a right lane departure.
LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. lane boundary.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on the NOTE:
top rear of the vehicle below the center light. The image displayed on the display may appear
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the slightly deformed.
intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the
sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
width of the vehicle and will show separate zones
through the Uconnect system Ú page 120.
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
NOTE: the vehicle. The following table shows the
 When enabled the system operates above approximate distances for each zone:
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
(180 km/h).
 The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 4
signal. Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
 The system will not apply torque to the steering Rear Back Up Camera Location Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and/or
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision when the rear doors are closed, the rear camera WARNING!
Warning, etc.). mode is exited and the previous screen appears.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
When engaged in the REVERSE gear, with the “Camera
when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA Delay” turned on, the camera image will continue to be
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after switching out of
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
the REVERSE position, unless the speed of the vehicle
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
does not exceed 8 mph (13 km/h), or that the gear is
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
placed in the NEUTRAL or PARK position. When the
gear selector is put into REVERSE and/or when the rear your surroundings and must continue to pay
gear is no longer in the REVERSE position, on the radio
doors are opened. The image will be displayed on the attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
display, together to the images behind it, a deactivation
touchscreen display along with a caution note to result in serious injury or death.
button of the image displays on the camera screen, if
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the “Camera Delay” is active.
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The NOTE:

CAUTION! Surround View Camera system is comprised of four  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
 To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView CHMSL (top rear of the vehicle below the center light) displayed continuously until deactivated via the
camera is unable to view every obstacle or and side mirrors. touchscreen button "X", the transmission is
object in your drive path. NOTE: shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be The Surround View Camera system has program- OFF position.
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able mable settings that may be selected through the  The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is Uconnect system Ú page 120. the camera image is made available ONLY when
recommended that the driver look frequently When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. View and Top View is the default view of the system. When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
NOTE: camera delay turned on), the camera image will including the side view mirrors and its projected
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless back up path based on the steering wheel position.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the Different colored zones indicate the distance to
on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the rear of the vehicle.
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image. The following table shows the approximate
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
distances for each zone:
IF EQUIPPED camera delay turned off), the Surround View system is Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
exited and the last known screen appears again. Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a
different view is selected through the touchscreen soft to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
doors are open. The image will be displayed on the the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Modes Of Operation  Top View will show which sliding doors are open. NOTE:
“Manual” activation of the Surround View system  Open front doors will remove outside image. If the Back Up Camera was selected through the
is selected by pressing the Surround View Camera Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of screen
Rear View display will return to the Surround View menu.
soft key located in the Controls screen within the
Uconnect system. This is the default view of the system in If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
REVERSE and is always paired with the through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
Top View Top View of the vehicle with optional system, exiting out of the display screen will return
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with active guidelines for the projected path to the Controls menu.
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. when enabled. Deactivation
There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image Rear Cross Path View
at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will The system can be deactivated under the following
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will conditions: 4
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object. give the driver a wider angle view of the  The speed of the vehicle is greater than
Rear View. The Top View will be disabled 8 mph (13 km/h).
when this is selected.
 The vehicle shifted into PARK.
Front View
 The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE
The Front View will show you what is and the “X” button is pressed.
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the  The camera delay system is turned off manually
vehicle. through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 120.
Front Cross Path View NOTE:
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
the Front View. The Top View will be lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
Surround View Camera View cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
disabled when this is selected.
NOTE: Back Up Camera View  If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
 Front tires will be in image when the tires are see an authorized dealer.
Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key
turned.
will provide a full screen rear view.
 Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
WARNING! REFUELING THE VEHICLE 5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on
when using the Surround View Camera. Always the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or NOTE:
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure damaged, be sure to use the correct replacement During fuel fill, nozzle position could affect the flow
to check for pedestrians, animals, other cap for this vehicle. of fuel. For best results, allow the nozzle to rest
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before 1. Open the fuel filler door. naturally in the filler tube - do not raise the handle
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of to increase the fill angle.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
your surroundings and must continue to pay clockwise. WARNING!
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
CAUTION!
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
 To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View This is in violation of most state and federal
should only be used as a parking aid. fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
The Surround View camera is unable to view tion Indicator Light to turn on.
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
driven slowly when using Surround View to be You could be burned. Always place fuel
Fuel Filler
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. containers on the ground while filling.
It is recommended that the driver look 3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
Surround View. CAUTION!
NOTE:
 Damage to the fuel system or emissions
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
control system could result from using an
the fuel tank is full.
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
 Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
nozzle. ties into the fuel system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! VEHICLE LOADING GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING

 A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the As required by National Highway Traffic Safety (GVWR)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on. Administration regulations, your vehicle has a The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not B-pillar. cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not not exceed the GVWR.
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
is full. GROSS A XLE W EIGHT RATING (GAWR)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
NOTE: Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front 4
 Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a affixed to the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the driver’s door. exceed either front or rear GAWR.
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
The label contains the following information:
 If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL WARNING!
 Name of manufacturer
may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
every time the vehicle is refueled.  Month and year of manufacture
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE
 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the control of the vehicle and have a collision.
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a “Check Fuel Cap” message will be  Type of vehicle
displayed in the instrument cluster display Ú page 55.  Month, Day, and Hour (MDH) of manufacture
TIRE SIZE
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
the VIN.
properly tightened. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
If the problem continues, the message will appear capacity of this tire size.
the next time the vehicle is started. See an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
RIM S IZE Figure out the weight on the front and rear axle of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
TRAILER TOWING
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire distribute the load evenly over the front and rear In this section you will find safety tips and
size listed. axles. information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
I NFLATION P RESSURE Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your suspension components do not necessarily load as efficiently and safely as possible.
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross increase the vehicle's GVWR. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). coverage, follow the requirements and
LOADING recommendations in this manual concerning
CURB W EIGHT vehicles used for trailer towing.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose The following trailer towing related definitions
no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The items securely before driving. If weighing the will assist you in understanding the following
front and rear curb weight values are determined loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded information:
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale either Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), but the
before any occupants or cargo are added. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
total load is within the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), you must redistribute the The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
OVERLOADING vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
weight. Improper weight distribution can have an
The load carrying components (axle, springs, adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide handles and the way the brakes operate. so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 109.
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
NOTE:
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your and GAWRs.
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Distributing Hitch

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by
of all cargo, consumables and equipment ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the the load on your vehicle. are typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation” trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle
Trailer Frontal Area
condition. and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. more level ride, offering more consistent steering
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the scale. safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and 4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
while traveling.
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 109. and may be required depending on vehicle and
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
WARNING! swaying trailer and automatically applies individual Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
It is important that you do not exceed the attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. WARNING!
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is Weight-Carrying Hitch  An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue system may reduce handling, stability, braking
and have a collision. weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch performance, and could result in a collision.
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.  Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
small and medium sized trailers. with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM CAUTION! TOWING REQUIREMENTS

TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS) Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
NOTE: the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the drivetrain components, the following guidelines
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads are recommended.
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to CAUTION!
addresses:
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/ side which will cause loss of control of the  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
 ramtruck.ca (Canada) in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. axle or other parts could be damaged.
 rambodybuilder.com
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that 4
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight  The tongue weight of the trailer. throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing Ú page 198. When towing a trailer,
NOTE: never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
placard for the maximum combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo for your vehicle Ú page 230.
Weight Distribution
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

WARNING! WARNING!
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
 Make certain that the load is secured in the  Total weight must be distributed between the or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
trailer and will not shift during travel. When tow vehicle and the trailer such that the the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, following four ratings are not exceeded: and possible personal injury.
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
 GVWR  An electronically actuated trailer brake
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.  GTW
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not  GAWR trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading brake system, an electronic brake controller is
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
can cause a loss of control, poor performance not required.
utilized.
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and may be required for
or tires. Towing Requirements — Tires
any trailer, for example trailers in excess of
 Safety chains must always be used between your  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a 2,000 lb (907 kg). Trailer brake requirements
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to compact spare tire. vary by local law, consult local legal require-
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when ments where the trailer is to be towed for trailer
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough towing while using a full size spare tire. brake requirements.
slack for turning corners.  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
WARNING!
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission pressures before trailer usage. hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure system and cause it to fail. You might not have
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block brakes when you need them and could have an
damage before towing a trailer. accident.
or "chock" the trailer wheels.
 Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
 GCWR must not be exceeded. (Continued)
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
(Continued) and GAWR limits.
 For further information Ú page 225.
The electrical connections are all complete to the

WARNING! vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
distance. When towing, you should allow for NOTE:
additional space between your vehicle and the
 Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
result in an accident.
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
CAUTION!  Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) Seven-Pin Connector 4
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they 1 — Backup Lamps
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
2 — Tail Lamp
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping 3 — Left Stop/Turn
distances. 4 — Ground
5 — Battery
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And 6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer Four-Pin Connector
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are TOWING TIPS
required for motoring safety. 1 — Ground
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and 2 — Tail Lamp backing up the trailer in an area located away from
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved 3 — Left Stop/Turn heavy traffic.
trailer harness and connector. 4 — Right Stop/Turn
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
Automatic Transmission When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at Cruise Control — If Equipped
low speeds, holding your vehicle in FIRST gear
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
(using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
The transmission controls include a drive strategy to  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
transmission overheating.
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select Tow/Haul Mode disengage until you can get back to cruising
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using To reduce potential for automatic transmission speed.
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control). overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when  Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
NOTE: driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating control) on more severe grades.
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING DRIVING TIPS Traction

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
Acceleration cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to following precautions should be observed:
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. occurs when there is a difference in the surface
are slushy.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the traction under the front (driving) wheels.
 Slow down if the road has standing water or 4
transmission in PARK. puddles.
WARNING!
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,  Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden first become visible.
5. Release the parking brake. pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of  Keep tires properly inflated.
the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate  Maintain sufficient distance between your
CAUTION! slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). collision in a sudden stop.
 DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! CAUTION!

Driving through water more than a few inches/  Driving through standing water limits your  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
centimeters deep will require extra caution to vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed through standing water. This will minimize
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through wave effects.
Flowing/Rising Water standing water.
 Driving through standing water may cause
 Driving through standing water limits your damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
WARNING! vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
Do not drive on or across a road or path where stopping distances. Therefore, after driving (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm through standing water, drive slowly and signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road lightly press on the brake pedal several times or foamy in appearance) after driving through
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink to dry the brakes. standing water. Do not continue to operate
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
 Failure to follow these warnings may result in
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. as this may result in further damage. Such
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
Failure to follow this warning may result in damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
passengers, and others around you.
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your Limited Warranty.
passengers, and others around you.
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
CAUTION! cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
Shallow Standing Water  Always check the depth of the standing water
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
before driving through it. Never drive through
shallow standing water, consider the following Limited Warranty.
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
Cautions and Warnings before doing so. of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
 Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
(Continued)
119
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
NOTE:
 To help further improve user experience, features,
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
With 7-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With communications. Vehicle software technology security breach, vehicle owners should:
10.1-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
Owner’s Manual Supplement.  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
NOTE: (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
Uconnect screen images are for illustration The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to able Uconnect software updates.
purposes only and may not reflect exact software your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
 Only connect and use trusted media devices
for your vehicle. most recent version of vehicle software (such as
(e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
5
Uconnect software) is installed.
CYBERSECURITY
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless  ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
send and receive information. This information possibly contain malicious software, and if
allows systems and features in your vehicle to installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
function properly. possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
120 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
For the Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display And the
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument the radio. Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
panel. These buttons allow you to access and available programmable features.
change the customer programmable features. CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES
Many features can vary by vehicle. NOTE:
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or  Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the time.
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn settings may vary.
the control knob to scroll through menus and When making a selection, press the button on the
change settings. Push the center of the control touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
knob one or more times to select or change a the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting. setting option until a check mark appears next
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF to the setting, showing that setting has been
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate. selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On The Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the available settings.
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
MULTIMEDIA 121
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization
Display Mode
with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On

This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode 5
must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode
Display Brightness Headlights Off
must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance”
Units (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
Theme Mode
Select to show Themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in
This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Cluster
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
122 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to
Time Format be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a
24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”,
Wake Up Word
and “Hey, Ram”.
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off. For more information about Voice Barge-in, refer to
Voice Barge-in
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List on the Voice Recognition window to be shown on or off.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened,
Radio Off Delay
the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are opened.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
Navigation Settings
for further information.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings Ú page 132.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 123
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto”
Display Mode setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to
adjust the brightness of the display. 5
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi
Units or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar) and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
Theme Mode
Select to show Themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
124 MULTIMEDIA

Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in
This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Cluster
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Safety & Driving Assistance

When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium”
setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will
have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW
system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning
Forward Collision Warning
+ Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is
detected.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available options are “Off”,
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
“Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has changed in an area.
New Speed Zone Indication
The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
MULTIMEDIA 125

LaneSense Warning This setting will set the warning type for LaneSense. The available options are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength This setting will set the strength of the LaneSense system. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The available options are
ParkSense “Sound” which provides only an audible chime and “Sounds & Display” which provides both a sound and a
visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indicating that the driver may
Drowsy Driver Detection
be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” 5
Blind Spot Alert setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside
mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be
Set Time
available. The “+” setting will increase the hours and minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours and minutes.
126 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be
Time Format available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a
24-hour format.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll through the available
Set Date
days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 127
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”,
Wake Up Word
and “Hey, Ram”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the system.
Voice Barge-In
The available options are “On” and “Off”. 5
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the
Show Command List Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
128 MULTIMEDIA

ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
MULTIMEDIA 129
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is
Headlight Off Delay
turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights 5
Greeting Lights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a
Cornering Lights
light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
130 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a pop-up will display with
Brake Service
“Yes” and “No” options.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
 The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.

Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 131

This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound
Sound Horn With Lock the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press
doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button.
Of Key Fob Unlocks
The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) between “Off”, “All”, or “Approach”.
Key Off Options 5

When the Key Off Options Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off. The available options
Radio Off Delay
are “0 min”, or “20 min”.
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached.
Radio Off with Door
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
132 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle.
Balance
The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as
Speed Adjusted Volume
the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “max”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available settings are “Off”,
Auto-On Radio
“On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached.
Radio off With Door
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.).
Volume Adjustment
You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
MULTIMEDIA 133
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

Notification Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
5
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.

SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
134 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

Software Downloads over Wi-Fi This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Software License When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about the version
Version Information
of your radio.
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing information of
License Information
your radio.
MULTIMEDIA 135
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default. 5
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including
Clear Personal Data
Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available options
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
136 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES REGULATORY AND SAFETY The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being I NFORMATION The level of energy emitted is far less than the
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy US/CANADA electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
performance from your radio. This condition may devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is The radiated output power of the internal wireless situations or environments, such as aboard
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the will be used in such a manner that the radio is on the wireless radio Ú page 256.
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone 8 inch (20 cm) or further from the human body.
operation when not using the Uconnect system. The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
137
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
ment that may be susceptible to interference those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining caused by improperly installed or high output following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The radio transmitting equipment. This interference planing.
system operates with a separate computer to modulate can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. must never be exploited in a reckless or
performed by qualified professionals.
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish user’s safety or the safety of others.
to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
motor makes a low humming noise during Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
operation, which is normal. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
When you are in a severe braking condition 6
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. need to slow down or stop. some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not This is the result of the system reverting to the
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
functioning. The system reverts to standard base brake system.
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
non-anti-lock brakes. Placing the ignition in the
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
OFF mode and to the ON mode again may reset the
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking
ABS if the fault detected was only momentary.
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate
(Continued) that the system is functioning properly.
138 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) WARNING!

Crosswind Assist will activate automatically when
the vehicle reaches speeds above approximately
SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the 43 mph (70 km/h). When the system is activated,
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, the ESC Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing blink to warn the driver.
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS), Crosswind road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Assist (CWA), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill including those resulting from excessive speed in
Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or ESC enhances directional control and stability of
and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). These systems hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
complement the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by
optimizing the vehicle braking capability during dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
emergency braking maneuvers. user's safety or the safety of others. counteract the above conditions. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
Brake Assist System (BAS) the desired path.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s Crosswind Assist (CWA)  Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more
braking capability during emergency braking CWA helps keep your vehicle from drifting out of its lane than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency due to unexpected crosswinds by means of targeted
 Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount braking of individual wheels. The system will provide
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
of brake application and then applies optimum automatic stability assistance to counteract the effect
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce of strong side wind. If a strong lateral wind is detected, ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
braking distances. The BAS complements the front and rear brakes on the affected side are applied, vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes creating a steering effect that mitigates the crosswind the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. influence. During system intervention, the driver should does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
To receive the benefit of the system, you must perceive the natural stable handling feel of the vehicle. brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
apply continuous braking pressure during the counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
SAFETY 139
ESC Operating Modes

WARNING! WARNING!
The ESC OFF button is located in the
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent center switch bank, next to the hazard  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
the natural laws of physics from acting on the flasher switch. ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by described in the TCS section, has been
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent ESC On disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
accidents, including those resulting from exces- This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery equipped vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot started, the ESC system will be in this mode. disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle This mode should be used for most driving offered by the ESC system is reduced.
control due to inappropriate driver input for the situations. ESC should only be turned off for  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful specific reasons as noted below. the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited ESC Partial Off
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the NOTE:
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC OFF button. To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with
6
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial
maintain your vehicle, may change the
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC Off” mode by pushing the ESC OFF button. Once
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in the the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the
may negatively affect the performance of the
“Partial Off” mode, ESC will operate without engine “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
torque management. This mode is intended to be on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button.
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte- ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of of operation.
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
140 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light NOTE: HSA Activation Criteria

And ESC OFF Indicator Light  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The following criteria must be met in order for HSA
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on to activate:
Light in the instrument cluster will come momentarily each time the ignition switch is
 The vehicle must be stopped.
on when the ignition is turned to the ON placed in the ON position.
 The vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate)
mode. It should go out with the engine  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
grade or greater hill.
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
Light comes on continuously with the engine turned off previously.  Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
system. If this light remains on after several ignition vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph following the maneuver that caused the ESC when the activation criteria have been met.
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as activation. The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed
possible to have the problem diagnosed and in NEUTRAL or PARK.
corrected. Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The HSA system is designed to assist the driver WARNING!
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA
There may be situations on minor hills with a
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/ will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is applied for a short period of time after the driver
the system will not activate and slight rolling may
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver
occur. This could cause a collision with another
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up does not apply the throttle during this short period
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as of time, the system will release brake pressure and
responsible for braking the vehicle.
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
the prevailing road conditions. release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates to move in the intended direction of travel.
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
SAFETY 141
Towing With HSA to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
back while towing a trailer. excessively swaying trailer and will take the
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
WARNING! allow more engine torque to be applied to the
The system may reduce engine power and apply
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your active even if the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
the sway of the trailer.
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (in
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there NOTE:
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as
may not be enough brake pressure to hold TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
This indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid trailer tongue weight recommendations
light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the
rolling down an incline while resuming accel- Ú page 110.
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off
releasing the brake pedal. power may be reduced, and you may feel the
the ESC or TCS.
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
6
 HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, WARNING! attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
be certain to place the transmission in PARK. disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
 The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of Off” mode.
 Failure to follow these warnings can result in a physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
collision or serious personal injury. increase the traction afforded. WARNING!
 The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
Traction Control System (TCS) those resulting from excessive speed in turns, down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
or hydroplaning. adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake  The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and must never be exploited in a reckless or
engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, the user's safety or the safety of others.
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly
142 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
I F EQUIPPED rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located monitors the detection zones on both sides of
inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/ will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
side of the vehicle. NOTE:
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver Radar Sensor Locations
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are If the system detects degraded performance due
outside the detection zones. to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
 The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the indicators in the side view mirrors will be on.
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a The warning indicators will remain illuminated until
motorcycle or any small object remains at the blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
(more than a couple of seconds). After removing the blockage, the following
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors procedure can be used to reset the system, cycle
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
Rear Detection Zones
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system If the blockage message is still present after
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning can function properly. Do not block the taillights cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle again for a blockage.
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the racks, etc.).
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY 143
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the Overtaking Traffic
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the remains in the blind spot for approximately
radio volume Ú page 145. 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). 6
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM Overtaking/Approaching
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring
144 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)

RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic, and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Overtaking/Passing Opposing Traffic

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, WARNING!
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
However, occasionally the system may alert on to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
such objects. This is normal operation and your The BSM system is not designed to detect
vehicle does not require service. pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
RCP Detection Zones
in adjacent lanes Ú page 256. shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
serious injury or death. sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
SAFETY 145
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), Blind Spot Modes NOTE:
the driver is alerted using both the visual and Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
audible alarms, including reducing the radio BSM system, the radio is also muted.
that are available in the Uconnect system.
volume. When the system is in RCP, the system shall
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
NOTE: respond with both visual and audible alerts when
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, side view mirror based on a detected object. hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
the system will not be able to alert the driver. However, when the system is operating in Rear always requests the chime.
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with
Blind Spot Alert Off
WARNING! both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup requested, the radio is muted. visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a systems.
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
NOTE:
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in The BSM system will store the current operating 6
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, the appropriate side view mirror based on a mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of be recalled and used.
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
serious injury or death. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the
visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
146 SAFETY
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped Automatic Trailer Detection Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot There are two modes of operation for the detection Once the trailer presence has been established,
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind of the trailer length: the trailer length will be established (by making
spot zone to work while pulling a trailer.  Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is a 90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
selected, the system will use the blind spot category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
NOTE:
sensors to automatically determine the pres- displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a completing the turn.
Path is disabled.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar NOTE:
functions: within 90 seconds of forward movement of the During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
 Automatic Trailer Detection 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once “trailer detection request” is enabled by the
 Trailer Length Detection the trailer has been detected, the system will system once the vehicle resumes motion.
 Trailer Merge Warning default to the maximum blind spot zone until the The maximum trailer length supported by the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in Trailer Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m).
the instrument panel cluster . Trailer length is considered the forward most
 Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is portion of the trailer hitch to the rearward most
selected, the system will default to the maximum portion of the body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of the
blind spot zone regardless of what size trailer is trailer.
attached . The maximum width supported by the Trailer
NOTE: Merge Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is width is measured at the widest portion of the
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting, trailer and may include wheels, tires, finders,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings or rails.
Ú page 120.
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
SAFETY 147
NOTE: Trailer length will be identified and placed into one NOTE:
The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in of the following categories:  The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots,  Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any other will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) . that are outside the detection zones.
crowded area may prevent the radar sensors
 Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft  The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
from being able to adequately detect the trailer.
(3 m to 6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
The system will try to detect a trailer at every
to 20 ft (6 m) . side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
ignition cycle or 90 seconds of standstill.
 Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(9 m) . (more than a couple of seconds).
 Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to  Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor-
12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to Max hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of
distance . false alerts. This is normal operation.
NOTE: WARNING!
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of 6
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
subject to being placed in the category above or The BSM system is not designed to detect
Trailer Length Detection pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
below the correct one.
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
1 — Trailer Length Trailer Merge Warning
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
2 — Trailer Hitch Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind shoulder, and use your turn signal before
3 — Trailer Width spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a serious injury or death.
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by
the illumination of the BSM warning light located in
the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle is
detected on. In addition, an audible (chime) alert
will be heard and radio volume will be reduced
Ú page 145.
148 SAFETY
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed NOTE:
below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide  The minimum speed for FCW activation is
WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED the maximum braking possible to mitigate the 3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver potential forward collision. Vehicles With Automatic
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the Transmission: After the end of the intervention of
automatic braking, the transmission may remain in other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
last gear stored — therefore the vehicle could lurch posts based on the course prediction. This is
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
forward, once the brakes release a few seconds expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
later. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation and functionality.
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. event stops the vehicle completely, the system will  It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and such misuse of the system the Active Braking
NOTE: portion of FCW will be deactivated for the first
then release the brakes.
FCW monitors the information from the forward 20 seconds from braking actuation.
looking camera as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a  The FCW system is intended for on-road use
forward collision. When the system determines only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
be provided with audible and visual warnings as essary warnings to the surroundings.
well as a possible brake jerk warning.  FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
If the driver does not take action based upon these overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
progressive warnings, then the system will provide not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
a limited level of active braking to help slow the that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and FCW Message  FCW will be disabled with the unavailable
the system determines that the driver intends to screens Ú page 256.
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied When the system determines a collision with the
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
and provide additional brake force as required. warning message will be deactivated.
SAFETY 149
 When FCW status is set to “Warning and  Medium

WARNING! Braking”, this allows the system to warn the  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in “Medium” setting and the system status is
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW front using audible/visual warnings and it “Only Warning”, this allows the system to
detect every type of potential collision. The driver applies autonomous braking. warn the driver of a possible collision with
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by  The FCW system state is kept in memory from the vehicle in front using audible/visual
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. one ignition position to the next. If the system is warnings.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to turned off, it will maintain its status in the next  Near
serious injury or death. key cycle.
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity “Near” setting and the system status is
Turning FCW On Or Off The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are “Only Warning”, this allows the system to
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display programmable through the Uconnect system warn the driver of a possible closer collision
in the control settings Ú page 120. Ú page 120. with the vehicle in front using audible/
 To turn the FCW system on, press the forward visual warnings.
 Far
collision button once.
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
 This setting provides less reaction time than 6
 To turn the FCW system off, press the forward the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
“Far” setting and the system status is “Only
collision button once. allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
Warning”, this allows the system to warn the
ence.
NOTE: driver of a possible more distant collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/  More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
 Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
visual warnings. want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
the system, so no warning or active braking will this setting.
be available in case of a possible collision.  More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting. NOTE:
 Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
NOTE: The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
prevents the system from providing limited
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
active braking, or additional brake support if the The “Far” setting may result in a greater
driver is not braking adequately in the event of number of FCW possible collision warnings
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the experienced.
audible and visual warnings.
150 SAFETY
FCW Limited Warning The “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” message can Precautions While Driving With FCW
sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
If the instrument cluster displays “FCW Limited In certain driving conditions, such as:
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean  Driving in the vicinity of a curve
ice and snow). The system will recover after the
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,  Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or  Lane changing of other vehicles
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
objects in its path, this warning may temporarily
conditions, the active braking may not be fully  Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the
available. Once the condition that limited the
driver should examine the fascia/bumper where The intervention of the system could be
system performance is no longer present, the
the camera is located. It may require cleaning or unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore
system will return to its full performance state.
removal of an obstruction from the fascia/bumper always pay particular attention, while maintaining
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
cover. control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety.
Service FCW Warning
NOTE: Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster  If the “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” message Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could
displays: “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every detect the presence of a vehicle that is in front of
this indicates there is an internal system fault. trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other the vehicle, but that does not preside in the same
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal obstruction, have the camera realigned at an lane. In cases such as this, the system might
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. respond.
authorized dealer.
 Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is
“FCW Temporarily Unavailable” Warning
not recommended. Doing so may block the
The “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” warning will be camera and inhibit FCW operation.
displayed when conditions temporarily deactivate
 Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use
the system. This most often occurs at times of poor
solvents or abrasive pastes.
visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will show
“FCW Temporarily Unavailable” and the system will
deactivate.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
SAFETY 151
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
The system is not able to detect the presence of (TPMS)
vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but placed
outside the field of action of the camera and could The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
therefore not react in the presence of small warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicles such as bicycles or motorcycles. vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
that crossed the range of the camera in an (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
oncoming intersection. inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum 6
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles adjustment for this increased pressure.
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, while staying See Ú page 225 on how to properly inflate the
in the traffic lane of their vehicle and inside the vehicle’s tires.
field of action of the camera, may cause the
intervention of the system. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection through the tire.
152 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, NOTE:
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold care and maintenance or to provide warning of
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the placard pressure value. a tire failure or condition.
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
CAUTION!  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
 The TPMS has been optimized for the original
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
and warning have been established for the tire
Light will turn off once the system receives the failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
system operation or sensor damage may result
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
when using replacement equipment that is not
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
information. maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
NOTE: to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) has not reached the level to trigger illumination
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an of the TPMS Warning Light.
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended dealership to have your sensor function pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard checked. tire pressure in the tire Ú page 256.
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient Base System
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will This is the TPMS warning indicator
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to prevent moisture and dirt from entering the located in the instrument cluster.
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning sensor. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
SAFETY 153
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure Check TPMS Warnings 1. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
readings to the receiver module. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
NOTE: pressure in the spare tire.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on
It is particularly important for you to check the tire solid when a system fault is detected, an audible 2. If a spare tire not equipped with the Tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly chime will be activated and the “Tire Pressure Pressure Monitoring System sensor is used,
and to maintain the proper pressure. Monitoring Unavailable” message will display. the TPMS Warning Light will turn on, flashing
The TPMS consists of the following components: If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will for 75 seconds and then remaining solid for
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The each subsequent ignition key cycle.
 Receiver module
TPMS Warning Light will turn off when the fault 3. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light with any of the following scenarios: spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low  Jamming due to electronic devices or driving and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
next to facilities emitting the same radio Warning Light will extinguish once the updated
Pressure Warnings tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
 Installing some form of aftermarket window
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this 6
chime will be activated, and the “Check tire tinting that affects radio wave signals
information.
pressure” message will display when one or more of  Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should  Using tire chains on the vehicle NOTE:
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, For correct Tire Pressure Monitoring System
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in
sensors
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s key-off during each tire substitution.
recommended cold placard pressure value. The NOTE:
system will automatically update and the Tire Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size spare
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will wheel.
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have
been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
154 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating

position Ú page 168. WARNING!
Some of the most important safety features in your 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
vehicle are the restraint systems: rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT SYSTEMS front passenger seat, move the seat as far
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
back as possible and use the proper child
FEATURES restraint Ú page 168. child in a rear-facing child restraint.
 Seat Belt Systems 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags behind them or under their arm. front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
5. You should read the instructions provided with child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
 Child Restraints
your child restraint to make sure that you are does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
Some of the safety features described in this rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
using it properly.
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. shoulder belts properly. SEAT BELT S YSTEMS
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS be moved back as far as practical to allow the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
Please pay close attention to the information in front air bags room to inflate. a poor driver and could cause a collision that
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your includes you. This can happen far away from home
system properly, to keep you and your passengers vehicle has side air bags, and deployment or on your own street.
as safe as possible. occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
Here are some simple steps you can take to into the space between occupants and the they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: door and occupants could be injured. collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
1. Children 12 years old and under should 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a modified to accommodate a disabled person, reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
vehicle with a rear seat. see Ú page 253 for customer service contact injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
information. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
times.
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
SAFETY 155
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the NOTE:
(BeltAlert) outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
the driver and outboard front seat sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder on and remain on until the driver and outboard
passenger (if equipped with outboard Light will remain on until the seat belts are front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may Lap/Shoulder Belts
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver
whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV (START) and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all with lap/shoulder belts.
Initial Indication occupants to buckle their seat belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
Change Of Status very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
is first in the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) If the driver or outboard front seat passenger with you under normal conditions. However, in a
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
6
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence out of the vehicle.
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
first in the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not WARNING!
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on active when the outboard front passenger seat is
and remain on until both outboard front seat belts  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat more severe injuries in a collision. The air
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
passenger seat is unoccupied. properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
BeltAlert Warning Sequence restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
though you have air bags.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed. (Continued)
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
156 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 In a collision, you and your passengers can  Two people should never be belted into a  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
suffer much greater injuries if you are not single seat belt. People belted together can properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- crash into one another in a collision, hurting far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder Wear your seat belt snugly.
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
sure you and others in your vehicle are matter what their size.
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
buckled up properly.
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
WARNING!
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
ously injured or killed. of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, your strongest bones will take the force in a
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap collision.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
seat belts.  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
keep it snug.
protect you from injury during a collision. You
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop- are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
including the driver, should always wear their
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, and shoulder belt are meant to be used
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat together.
provided at their seating position to minimize
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized (Continued)
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
of a crash.
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
could ride too high on your body, possibly
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too. (Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 157
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is

WARNING! too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
 A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
collision and leave you with no protection. under the seat belt in a collision.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your Pulling Out The Latch Plate
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
facility for inspection. the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Positioning The Lap Belt 6
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and adjust the seat. and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
shoulder belt.
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
your lap. slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle the seat belt to retract fully.
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
158 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure NOTE:

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
lap/shoulder belt. equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the upward position without pushing or squeezing
the anchor point. the release button. To verify the shoulder belt
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that position.
begins immediately above the latch plate.
WARNING!
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded Adjustable Anchorage
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
slot at the top of the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it might suffer internal injuries, or you could
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
no longer twisted. instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
position. After you release the anchorage button,
to keep your passengers safe, too.
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage locked in position.  Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
upward or downward to position the seat belt away The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage shoulder belt.
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
down to the position that serves you best. the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
 Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Anchorage
SAFETY 159
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking
The front seat belt system is equipped with Retractor (ALR)
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
These devices may improve the performance of Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt restraint system Ú page 171. The figure below
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size illustrates the locking feature for each seating
occupants, including those in child restraints. position.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
an accident is reduced for the mother and the pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
6
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. replaced immediately.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the Energy Management Feature
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Front Bucket Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
Energy Management feature that may help further Retractor (ALR) Location
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
behind the back or under the arm.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
160 SAFETY
restraint is installed in a seating position that has How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
and under should always be properly restrained in allow it to retract completely to disengage the
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in WARNING!
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
front air bag can cause death or serious injury switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
to a child 12 years or younger, including a feature or any other seat belt function is not
Front Bench Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking child in a rear-facing child restraint. working properly when checked according to
Retractor (ALR) Locations the procedures in the Service Manual.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to belt or children who are using booster seats.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode The locked mode is only used to install
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward that have a harness for restraining the child.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a until the entire seat belt is extracted.
"click." 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Locking Mode.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
SAFETY 161
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS Air Bag Warning Light following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
(SRS) The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
Some of the safety features described in this parts of the air bag system whenever the during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
section may be standard equipment on some ignition switch is in the AVV (START) or tion switch is first in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
models, or may be optional equipment on others. MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the ignition switch position.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position the air bag  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. four to eight-second interval.
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The ORC contains a backup power supply system  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting that may deploy the air bag system even if the tently or remains on while driving.
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the prior to deployment.
NOTE:
following Air Bag System Components: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Air Bag System Components instrument panel for approximately four to eight Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) In this condition the air bags may not be ready to 6
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. After the inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
 Air Bag Warning Light self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. dealer service the air bag system immediately.
 Steering Wheel and Column If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
 Instrument Panel system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either WARNING!
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags sound to alert you if the light comes on again after Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch initial startup. instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
 Supplemental Side Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that will light does not come on as a bulb check when the
 Front and Side Impact Sensors illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the an authorized dealer service the air bag system
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system immediately.
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
162 SAFETY
Front Air Bags

WARNING! WARNING!
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.  Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-  No objects should be placed over or near the
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt ment panel during front air bag deployment air bag on the instrument panel or steering
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is could cause serious injury, including death. Air wheel because any such objects could cause
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the ably extending your arms to reach the steering enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. wheel or instrument panel.
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in covers or attempt to open them manually. You
embossed on the air bag covers. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger may damage the air bags and you could be
front air bag can cause death or serious injury injured because the air bags may no longer be
to a child 12 years or younger, including a functional. The protective covers for the air
child in a rear-facing child restraint. bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle more severe injuries in a collision. The air
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Front Air Bag Locations Features
Front Air Bag Operation
1 — Driver Front Air Bag The driver and passenger front air bag system is
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag designed to inflate based on the severity and type Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
of collision as determined by the Occupant protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
information from the front impact sensors injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
(if equipped) or other system components. air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
SAFETY 163
including some that may produce substantial Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
vehicle damage — for example, some pole the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam
collisions. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental into the space between the occupant and the door.
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) a high force that it could injure occupants if they
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but are located in the outboard side of the front seats. are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
that produce a severe initial deceleration. The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the an even greater risk of injury from a deploying
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle air bag.
outboard side of the seats.
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
WARNING!
or not an air bag should have deployed.
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat Do not use accessory seat covers or place
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
belts and body structure. objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
performance could be adversely affected and/or
position, away from an inflating air bag.
objects could be pushed into you, causing 6
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects serious injury.
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
generated to inflate the front air bags.
(SABICs)
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
the driver and front passenger. or “AIRBAG.”
164 SAFETY
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag

WARNING! occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
other cargo up high enough to block the deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
above the side windows where the SABIC and damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
its deployment path are located should or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
remain free from any obstructions. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do collisions, including some collisions at certain
not install any accessory items in your vehicle angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Label Location market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
roof racks that require permanent attach- collisions where the front air bags deploy.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and vehicle for any reason. than it takes to blink your eyes.
body structure.
Side Impacts
WARNING!
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in  Occupants, including children, who are up against
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to Controller (ORC) determines whether the injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular should never lean on or sleep against the door,
properly, or if items are positioned in the area impact event is appropriate, based on the severity side windows, or area where the side air bags
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. the ORC in determining the appropriate response restraint.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or to impact events. The system is calibrated to (Continued)
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
side windows in certain side impact events.
SAFETY 165
NOTE: Air Bag System Components

WARNING! Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
NOTE:
 Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
are necessary for your protection in all collisions. Rollover Events the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
They also help keep you in position, away from an Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection designed to activate in certain rollover events. nents listed below:
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
against the seats. Children must be properly  Air Bag Warning Light
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not  Steering Wheel and Column
is appropriate for the size of the child. a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags  Instrument Panel
and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
WARNING! The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean sensing system determines if a rollover event  Supplemental Side Air Bags
against the door or window. Sit upright in the may be in progress and whether deployment is  Front and Side Impact Sensors
6
center of the seat. appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
deployment could cause you to be severely appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy If A Deployment Occurs
injured or killed. the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on The front air bags are designed to deflate
both sides of the vehicle. immediately after deployment.
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or NOTE:
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain complete ejection of vehicle occupants through Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags side windows in certain rollover or side impact sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt events. the air bag system.
even though you have Side Air Bags.
166 SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys the air  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
bags, any or all of the following may occur: WARNING! power or until the hazard light button is pressed.
 The air bag material may sometimes cause abra- Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners The hazard lights can be deactivated by
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air pressing the hazard light button.
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
similar to friction rope burns or those you might retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized long as the battery has power.
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
 Unlock the power door locks.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals. Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
They are not permanent and normally heal NOTE:
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi- After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
NOTE: the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blis-
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
tering, see your doctor immediately.
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some engine compartment and on the ground near the
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
to an authorized dealer immediately.
by-product of the process that generates the the system and starting the engine. If there are no
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These Fuel Cut Off Switch fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off switch. (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the Fuel Cut
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, In the event of an accident, if the communication Off Switch by following the procedure described
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat network remains intact, and the power remains below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation intact, depending on the nature of the event, the dealer.
continues, see your doctor. If these particles Fuel Cut Off Switch may perform the following
settle on your clothing, follow the garment functions:
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
 Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have engine.
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
SAFETY 167
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an
event push the “A” Button located underneath the WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
instrument panel on the passenger side.  Modifications to any part of the air bag system
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
could cause it to fail when you need it. You or may not function properly if modifications are
could be injured if the air bag system is not made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo- for any air bag system service. If your seat,
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub be serviced in any way (including removal or
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
instrument panel. Do not modify the front take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add manufacturer approved seat accessories may
aftermarket side steps or running boards. be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the authorized dealer.
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
Fuel Cut Off Switch
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
6
bag system. Event Data Recorder (EDR)
WARNING! This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(Continued)
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see leaks (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
from the fuel system, do not reset the Fuel Cut certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
Off Switch to avoid the risk of fire. Before an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
resetting the Fuel Cut Off Switch, carefully check data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
for fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
devices (e.g. headlights). data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
168 SAFETY
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment There are different sizes and types of restraints for
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is children from newborn size to the child almost
such data as: needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper- other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
ating; the special equipment, can read the information if have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
belts were buckled/fastened; CHILD R ESTRAINTS labels attached to the child restraint.
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, all times, including babies and children. Every it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. state in the United States, and every Canadian Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
These data can help provide a better province, requires that small children ride in you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
understanding of the circumstances in which proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
NOTE:
crashes and injuries occur. can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
 For additional information, refer to http://
NOTE: Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a call: 1–888–327–4236
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- Canada’s website for additional information:
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
WARNING!
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
child-car-seat-safety.html
other parties, such as law enforcement, could In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
combine the EDR data with the type of personally a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash to hold even an infant on your lap could become
investigation. so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
SAFETY 169
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
Small Children
the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children
but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Restraints height or weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints than at least two years old. Children should remain Older Children And Child Restraints
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
Safety experts recommend that children ride
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Children who are two years old or who have 6
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
old or until they reach either the height or weight seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
WARNING!
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
carriers and convertible child seats. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger children who are over two years old or who have
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the front air bag can cause death or serious injury outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth to a child 12 years or younger, including a their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
until they reach the weight or height limit of the child in a rear-facing child restraint. should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. weight or height allowed by the child seat.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
170 SAFETY
All children whose weight or height is above the 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a WARNING! touching the child’s thighs and not the
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s  When your child restraint is not in use, secure stomach?
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. whole trip?
the child’s back is against the seatback, they Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. sudden stop or accident, it could strike the If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are occupants or seatbacks and cause serious then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
held in the vehicle by the seat belt. personal injury. this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
WARNING! the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
 Improper installation can lead to failure of an or slouching can move the belt out of position.
Children who are large enough to wear the If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
enough to bend over the front of the seat when a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
their back is against the seatback, should use the correctly.
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
infant or child restraint.
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s WARNING!
 After a child restraint is installed in the seat belt alone:
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
or rearward because it can loosen the child back of the vehicle seat?
restraint attachments. Remove the child the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over which may result in serious injury or death.
position. When the vehicle seat has been the front of the vehicle seat while the child is A child must always wear both the lap and
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. still sitting all the way back? shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
(Continued) 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
SAFETY 171
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Installing Child Restraints Using The

Vehicles Vehicle Seat Belt
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
a family vehicle and is not intended for carrying in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
children in the front passenger seat(s). Never install of a lap/shoulder belt.
rear-facing child restraints in this vehicle. Although
the seat belt can be locked to secure a child WARNING!
restraint, there are no tether anchorages to
 Improper installation or failure to properly
complete the proper installation of a forward-facing
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
child restraint. If you must carry a child in a
the restraint. The child could be badly injured Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat
or killed. Location
should be moved to the full rearward position and
the child must be in a proper restraint system based  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
on its age, size and weight. Follow the instructions directions exactly when installing an infant or
below to secure the child restraint using the child restraint.
seat belt. 6
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
WARNING! equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child
passenger air bag. In a collision, a passenger air restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
bag may deploy causing severe injury or death to clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
infants riding in rear-facing infant restraints. locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” Locations
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Retractors (ALR)” Ú page 159 for additional
information on ALR.
172 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
SAFETY TIPS
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS
part of the belt until you have pulled all
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
the seat belt webbing out of the retractor.
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion CARGO AREA.
Then, allow the webbing to retract back into
of a lap/shoulder belt.
the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
WARNING!
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt
WARNING!
is now in the Automatic Locking mode.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 Improper installation or failure to properly 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of is locked, you should not be able to pull out any may cause serious injury or death.
the restraint. The child could be badly injured webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
or killed. step 5. area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to sion, people riding in these areas are more
directions exactly when installing an infant or tighten the lap portion around the child likely to be seriously injured or killed.
child restraint. restraint while you push the child restraint  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
1. Place the child seat in the center of the 8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly seat belts.
seating position. by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the the belt path. It should not move more than
and using a seat belt properly.
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
SAFETY 173
TRANSPORTING P ETS SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE Defroster

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about place the blower control on high speed. You should
Seat Belts be able to feel the air directed against the
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts your defroster is inoperable.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
must be replaced immediately. Do not Floor Mat Safety Information
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
disassemble or modify the system.
seat belts. Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
CONNECTED VEHICLES have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
Program facility for inspection. interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to Air Bag Warning Light impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for 6
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System WARNING!
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” Ú page 119. when the ignition switch is first placed in An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
WARNING! light is either not on during starting, stays on, or fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the turns on while driving, have the system inspected with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
breached. It may be possible that vehicle the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
systems, including safety related systems, could single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
occur that may result in an accident involving removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
serious injury or death. remains on while driving, have an authorized
down or turn your floor mat over.
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
Ú page 154.
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
(Continued)
174 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING!
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is Tires
before installing any other floor mat. moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
NEVER install or stack an additional erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. loss of vehicle control.
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat change the position of the floor mat and may lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved cause interference with the accelerator, (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of brake, or clutch pedals. Lights
your vehicle.
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and Have someone observe the operation of brake
 ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s re-installed, always properly attach carpet to lights and exterior lights while you work the
side floor area. To check for interference, with the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are controls. Check turn signal and high beam
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress indicator lights on the instrument panel.
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch each pedal to check for interference with the
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then Door Latches
floor mat interferes with the operation of any re-install the floor mats. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the Fluid Leaks
 It is recommended to only use mild soap and
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, Check area under the vehicle after overnight
in your trunk.
always check your floor mat has been properly parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on installed and is secured to your vehicle using Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
the passenger’s side floor area. the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
(Continued) be located and corrected immediately.
SAFETY 175
EXHAUST GAS The best protection against carbon monoxide entry CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
WARNING! engine exhaust system. WARNING!
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
and odorless. Breathing it can make you or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an carbon monoxide poisoning:
unconscious and can eventually poison you. authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: system and adjacent body areas for broken, carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
confined areas any longer than needed to Open seams or loose connections could permit closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
move your vehicle in or out of the area. exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger a parked vehicle with the engine running for
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
 If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
system each time the vehicle is raised for an open area with the engine running for more
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. than a short period, adjust the ventilation
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
system to force fresh, outside air into the 6
vehicle.
use the recirculation mode.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
the engine running, adjust your heating or
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
cooling controls to force outside air into the
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
The overhead console contains an SOS and ASSIST
button.
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on continue to operate even though the ignition is
the instrument panel below the climate controls. placed in the OFF position. WARNING!
NOTE: ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
may wear down your battery. the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
SOS AND ASSIST SYSTEM features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Hazard Warning Flashers Button  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 256.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all  The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button (data) network, which comes as a built in function.
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
Assist And SOS Buttons
Flashers. SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and connected
1 — SOS Button to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
This is an emergency warning system and it should
2 — ASSIST Button network.
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 177
SOS Call 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact

WARNING! appropriate emergency responders and
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to provide them with important vehicle
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on information and GPS coordinates.
NOTE: the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, and assume all risks related to the use of the
there will be a ten second delay before the SOS WARNING!
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. use the features and applications when it is safe  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS to do so. Failure to do so may result in an (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
call button on the overhead console or press the accident involving serious injury or death. conditions or location), do not wait for voice
cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termi- contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
nation of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
light on the overhead console. NOTE: and move to a safe location.
2. The LED lights located within the SOS and  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
ASSIST buttons on the overhead console will
operable network and GPS antennas. You
turn green once a connection to a SOS  Once a connection is made between the could prevent operable network and GPS
operator has been made. vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- signal reception, which can prevent your
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a ator, the SOS operator may be able to open vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system a voice connection with the vehicle to deter- operable network and GPS signal reception is 7
may transmit the following important vehicle mine if additional help is needed. Once the required for the SOS Call system to function
information to a SOS operator: SOS operator opens a voice connection with properly.
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
 Indication that the occupant placed a (Continued)
should be able to speak with you or other
SOS Call
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
 The vehicle brand ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
 The last known GPS coordinates of the system will attempt to remain connected
vehicle with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS ator terminates the connection.
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations

WARNING! WARNING!
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
 The SOS Call system is embedded into the  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- system capabilities.
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after- able network and GPS antennas. You could
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s elec- prevent operable network and GPS signal recep-
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
trical system. This may prevent your vehicle from tion, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. an emergency call. An operable network and GPS If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call signal reception is required for the SOS Call any of the following may occur at the time the
system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment system to function properly. malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data each ignition cycle:
 The SOS Call system is embedded into the
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system  The overhead console lights located within the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously illumi-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s elec-
VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY nate red.
trical system. This may prevent your vehicle from
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.  The Device Screen will display the following
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call message: “Vehicle device requires service.
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment Please contact an authorized dealer.”
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
system could cause the air bag system to fail recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system device requires service. Please contact an
when you need it. You could be injured if the or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR authorized dealer.”
air bag system is not there to help protect you. VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- WARNING!
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
WARNING! SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.  Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call If the overhead console light is illuminated,
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road system could cause the air bag system to fail have an authorized dealer service the SOS
conditions or location), do not wait for voice when you need it. You could be injured if the Call system immediately.
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All air bag system is not there to help protect you.
(Continued)
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion NOTE:

WARNING!
 Weather  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
 The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on rized by the subscriber.
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
tunnels  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- WARNING! antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
nated, have an authorized dealer service the
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, network connection and a GPS signal is
and assume all risks related to the use of the
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent required for the SOS Call system to function
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These properly.
include, but are not limited to, the following
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an NOTE:
factors:
accident involving serious injury or death. Changes or modifications not expressly approved
 The ignition is in the OFF position by the party responsible for compliance could void
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware WARNING!
CAUTION! 7
are damaged during a crash ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
disconnected during a vehicle crash
and assume all risks related to the use of the the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or and wipe the mirror clean.
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
 Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility accident involving serious injury or death.
 Operator error by the SOS operator
Automatic SOS — If Equipped JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
can immediately connect you with help in the event WARNING!
ice or slippery areas.
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
your provided radio supplement for complete WARNING!
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
information.
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
ASSIST Call Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically the wheel.
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
connect you to any one of the following support  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. operating the jack or changing the wheel.
centers: The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or you. You could be crushed. Never put any part 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
you’ll be connected to someone who can help. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take 3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle it to a service center where it can be raised on 4. Place the transmission in PARK (P) or
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees a lift. REVERSE (R) for manual transmission.
may apply for roadside assistance. 5. Turn the ignition OFF.
 Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle is on a jack. 6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
support for SiriusXM Guardian™. diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all changing tires only. The jack should not be For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
other vehicle issues. used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
Radio, Phone and NAV issues. surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Wheel Blocked Example Jack Kit Location Lock Knob

NOTE: To release the jack kit from its storage location, 1 — Unlock Position
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when turn the lock knob a quarter turn counterclockwise 2 — Lock Position
the vehicle is being lifted or raised. to the unlock position.
J ACK L OCATION — I F EQUIPPED CAUTION!

Depending on vehicle trim level, the jack and jack Do not force lock knob over limit. Damage to
tools are stored under the front passenger seat in lock knob may occur. 7
a box, or strapped behind the driver seat in a tool
bag. Tools may vary.
To open the jack kit container, you must push the SPARE T IRE R EMOVAL
container’s release to separate the top and bottom.
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the vehicle. Attach the lug bolt
adapter to the winch extension and insert it
into the winch mechanism.
Jacking Tools
1 — Tow Eye — If Equipped
Container Release 2 — Wrench Handle
3 — Lug Bolt Adapter
4 — Jack
5 — Reversible Tool — If Equipped Jack Tools
6 — Tool Handle — If Equipped
7 — Winch Extension 1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Winch Extension
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-

clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
Winch Location Spare Tire

The winch mechanism is located under the 4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
rear of the vehicle in between the right rear tire clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
and spare tire. the cable.
Lowering Spare Tire

3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Winch Extension Lifting Spare Tire

5. Pull the retainer through the center of the

wheel. WARNING!
 Apply the parking brake firmly and place an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite of the
wheel that is to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is Jack Warning Label
on a jack.
Retainer  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
WARNING!  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
help prevent personal injury or damage to your  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
vehicle: careful of motor traffic.
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are Assembled Jack
the edge of the roadway as possible before securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
raising the vehicle. the valve stem facing the ground. 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
bolts by turning them counterclockwise one
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
(Continued)
2. There are two jack engagement locations on NOTE: NOTE:

each side of the vehicle body. The front jacking location is located behind the The rear jacking location is located in front of the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger door. rear tire and in front of the leaf spring mount.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
Front Lifting Point Rear Lifting Point
7
Jacking Engagement Locations
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with

WARNING! wheel covers, remove the cover from the CAUTION!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on Then pull the wheel off the hub. stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of 6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you lug bolts.
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
NOTE:
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw left
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter Ú page 247.
on the jack screw and turn clockwise until the
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
jack head is properly engaged in the described
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are 9. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire with the
sure the jack is securely engaged. cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the wrench handle and lug
bolt adapter. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough Mounting Spare Tire
clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
WARNING! jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the warning may result in serious injury.
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire. Damaged Wheel Stowage
10. Install the winch extension and rotate the

CAUTION! TIRE SERVICE KIT C OMPONENTS AND
wrench handle clockwise until the winch
mechanism operator hears “3 clicks” from the Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the
OPERATION
device to indicate the wheel is properly stowed hub cap. Do not use a twisting motion when
under the vehicle. removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap
11. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle finish may occur.
tools back in the storage compartment.
WARNING! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
repaired or replaced immediately. in outside temperatures down to approximately
Tire Service Kit Components
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing 1 — Power Button
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) 2 — Mode Select Knob
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 3 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7
For vehicles with aluminum wheels: 4 — Sealant Bottle
TIRE SERVICE KIT S TORAGE
The center cap must be pushed out from the rear 5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
to install the retainer and stow the tire. Depending on vehicle trim levels, the Tire Service 6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
Kit can be stored in the driver’s door pocket or the
7 — Power Plug
WHEEL C OVERS passenger’s side compartment area.
8 — Pressure Gauge
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in place 9 — Deflation Button
by the wheel lug bolts and can be removed after
the wheel lug bolts are taken off.
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses TIRE SERVICE K IT USAGE P RECAUTIONS  For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following  Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (4) connecting the Tire Service Kit.
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. and Sealant Hose (3) prior to the expiration date
 You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
 Selecting Air Mode (printed at the upper right hand corner on the
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
needles, located in the Accessory Storage
turn to this position for air pump oper- system Ú page 191.
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
ation only. Use the Black Air Pump for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
Hose (5) when selecting this mode. able items. However, use only the Air Pump
 Selecting Sealant Mode Hose (5) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and (2) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items
turn to this position to inject the Tire to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (3) when punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter
selecting this mode. in the tread of your tire.
 Using The Power Button  Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
Push and release the Power Button (1)
once to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
WARNING!
Push and release the Power Button (1)  The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3) are
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
a one tire application use and need to be
 Using The Deflation Button vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
replaced after each use. Always replace these
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
Push the Deflation Button (9) to components immediately at your original equip-
using the Tire Service Kit.
reduce the air pressure in the tire if it ment vehicle dealer.
becomes overinflated.  When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
form, clean water and a damp cloth will remove under the following circumstances:
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel  If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
components. Once the sealant dries, it can mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
 If the tire has any sidewall damage.
(Continued)
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P)

WARNING! WARNING! (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual
 If the tire has any damage from driving  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains transmission) and place the ignition in the
with extremely low tire pressure. latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, OFF position.
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire 4. Apply the parking brake.
 If the tire has any damage from driving on
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
a flat tire.
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
 If the wheel has any damage. water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
 If you are unsure of the condition of the the Sealant Mode position.
tire or the wheel. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then remove
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames SEALING A TIRE W ITH T IRE SERVICE K IT the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
or heat source. (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a Service Kit: next to the deflated tire.
collision or hard stop could endanger the 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers. screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to (3) onto the valve stem.
follow these warnings can result in injuries 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen- the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug 7
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
gers, and others around you.
Hoses (3) and (5) to reach the valve stem and
 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire NOTE:
keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground.
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
This will provide the best positioning of the kit
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful nails) from the tire.
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the tire and running the air pump. Move the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita- vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if this position before proceeding.
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into 3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to NOTE:
The Deflated Tire: previous use. Call for assistance. If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
 Always start the engine before turning ON the NOTE: mended inflation pressure before continuing.
Tire Service Kit. If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
NOTE: pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
Manual transmission vehicles must have the Pump Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose (3). 15 minutes:
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the Tire
NEUTRAL. Sealant Hose (3):
Service Kit.
 After pushing the Power Button (1), the sealant 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (4) 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of
longer flowing through the hose (typically takes
through the Sealant Hose (3) and into the tire. the Sealant Bottle (4) and place the sticker on
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the
the instrument panel.
NOTE: Sealant Hose (3), the Pressure Gauge (8) can read
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire. as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (8) 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (3)
will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (3): (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle (4) is empty. Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (3) 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve immediately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is CAUTION!
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant empty. Continue to operate the pump and
 The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
Hose (3) to the valve stem. Check that the inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Mode Select Knob (2) is in the Sealant Mode tire pressure label on the driver-side latch
pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire  Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (8). of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
Button (1) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: internal Tire Service Kit components which may
vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is cause permanent damage to the kit.
 The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
(D) Drive Vehicle: If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): NOTE:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
WARNING!
indicated on the tire and loading information 2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. label on the driver-side door opening. release button at the lower right hand corner
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced of the kit.
NOTE:
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation 3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- button, then pull out the bottle holding the
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
mended inflation pressure before continuing. button.
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and Service Kit housing.
unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the
(E) After Driving: 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage housing so that the Sealant Hose (3) aligns
Pull over to a safe location Ú page 189. area in the vehicle. with the hose slot in the front of the housing. 7
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
the Air Mode position. replaced at the earliest opportunity at an button, then push the bottle into the housing
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into authorized dealer or tire service center. by holding the button. An audible click will be
the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
Release the button.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color) instrument panel after the tire has been
and screw the fitting at the end of hose onto repaired. 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at
the valve stem. the end of the Sealant Hose (3) and return the
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
hose to its storage area (located on top of the
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Hose (3) assembly at an authorized dealer as
housing).
Pressure Gauge (8). soon as possible Ú page 191.
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a located under the hood, in the engine
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable compartment on the driver's side.
ignition to the OFF position.
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be The Remote positive (+) Post is covered with a
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
protective cap located on the side of the Front
the procedures in this section carefully. accessories.
Power Distribution Center.
NOTE: 3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
The Remote negative (-) Post is located on the core
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow over the remote positive (+) battery post.
support closest to the front of the vehicle.
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
precautions. battery, park the vehicle within the reach of the
jumper cables, apply the parking brake and
WARNING! make sure the ignition is OFF.
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause WARNING!
personal injury.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
Jump Starting Locations
any other booster source with a system voltage WARNING!
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, Remote Positive (+) Post
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may Remote Negative (-) Post
occur. whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
(Continued)
Connecting The Jumper Cables

WARNING! WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, cable to the remote positive (+) post of the Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
watch bands and bracelets that could make discharged vehicle. (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be electrical spark could cause the battery to
NOTE: explode and could result in personal injury.
seriously injured.
The remote positive (+) post is located in the
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn engine compartment on the driver's side under the
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas cover of the Front Power Distribution Center. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) booster battery. Let the engine idle a few
flames or sparks away from the battery. jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the minutes and then start the engine in the
booster battery. vehicle with the discharged battery.
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster necting procedure below.
WARNING! battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
could result in personal injury or property jumper cable to the remote negative post or a
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
good engine ground of the discharged vehicle.
damage due to battery explosion.
A “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
vehicle with the discharged battery. 7
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
CAUTION! booster battery.
must be away from the battery and the fuel
Failure to follow these procedures could result in injection system. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
damage to the charging system of the booster cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
NOTE:
vehicle or the discharged vehicle. battery.
The remote negative (-) post is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the driver's side.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)

jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
of the discharged vehicle, and reinstall the If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
protective cap. serviced by an authorized dealer.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribution In any of the following situations, you can reduce
Center. the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your  On the highways — slow down.
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.  In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
Battery Access Panel
CAUTION! engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, NOTE:
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). There are steps that you can take to slow down an
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without impending overheat condition:
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
and/or prevent the engine from starting. system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
 You can also turn the temperature control to
BATTERY LOCATION maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
There are two remote jump starting posts under Battery Location the blower control to high. This allows the heater
the hood which is the recommended jump start core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
location. If access to the battery is needed, an aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
access panel on the driver’s side floor will allow for system.
battery access.
WARNING! GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE 5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the
gear selector override release and push down
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector while depressing the shifter button at the
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you same time.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the can use the following procedure to temporarily
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator move the gear selector:
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling 1. Turn the engine OFF.
system pressure cap when the radiator or 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
coolant bottle is hot.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the shifter boot material of the gear
CAUTION! selector by pulling up to carefully separate the
gear selector bezel and boot assembly from
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage the console.
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
Gear Selector Override Release Lever
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear position. 7
continuous chimes, turn the engine off 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
immediately and call for service.
8. Reinstall the shifter boot and bezel.
Shifter Boot And Bezel

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE:

Push the ESC OFF button, to place the Electronic
CAUTION!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or Stability Control System (ESC) in “Partial OFF”  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 138. between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
clear the area around the front wheels. Shift back button again to restore “ESC ON” mode. drivetrain damage may result.
and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least WARNING!  Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will transmission overheating and failure. It can
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
wheels or racing the engine.
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire (no transmission shifting occurring).
could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
CAUTION!
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead longer than 30 seconds continuously without TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion vehicle using a commercial towing service.
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION!

prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose, The FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. requirements can cause severe transmission
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar If flatbed equipment is not available, and the damage. Damage from improper towing is
or other towing device to main structural members transmission is operable, this vehicle may be not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated towed (with front wheels on the ground) under the Warranty.
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles following conditions:
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
 The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
(40 km/h). SYSTEM (EARS)
 The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
(24 km). Accident Response System.
is discharged, for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK (P) for towing If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle This feature is a communication network that
Ú page 195. must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 166.
farther than 15 miles (24 km), tow with the front
CAUTION! wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) 7
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing. This vehicle is equipped with an event data
Vehicle damage may occur. CAUTION! recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,  Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
do not attach to front or rear suspension farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
components. Damage to your vehicle may wheels on the ground can cause severe trans- deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 167.
result from improper towing. mission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
change indicator system. The oil change indicator by someone other than an authorized dealer, the  Check windshield washer fluid level
system will remind you that it is time to take your message can be reset by referring to the steps  Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. described under Instrument Cluster Display wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of irreg-
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Ú page 56. ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
change indicator message will illuminate in the NOTE: cator system turns on
instrument cluster. This means that service is Under no circumstances should oil change  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), and brake master cylinder and fill as needed
as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,  Check function of all interior and exterior lights
or cold ambient temperatures will influence when whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within customers.
the next 500 miles (805 km).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas
and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
8
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake pads, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear door net block gap, adjust/replace as necessary. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Inspect the cabin air filter, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Replace the Brake Fluid every two years. 1 X X X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs. 2 X

100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
X X
whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 8
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L E NGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick

2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION!

Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
WARNING!  Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase level to the high end of the range marking.
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
 Never smoke while working in the engine This could damage your engine. CAUTION!
compartment: gas and inflammable vapors
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
may be present, with the risk of fire.
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
 Be very careful when working in the engine must be maintained at the correct level. Check the damage your engine.
compartment when the engine is hot: you may oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
get burned. Do not get too close to the radiator stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
cooling fan: the electric fan may start; danger about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine ADDING W ASHER F LUID
of injury. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing is shut off. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
might be pulled by moving parts. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground compartment and should be checked at regular
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
CAUTION! There are four possible dipstick types:
system for a few seconds to flush out any residual
 Crosshatched zone. water.
 Be careful not to confuse the various types of
fluids while topping up: they are not compatible  Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of
with each other! Topping up with an unsuitable  Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
fluid could severely damage your car. end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range. WARNING! 8
 The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the Commercially available windshield washer
 Always top up using engine oil of the same
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
specifications as that already in the engine.
NOTE: burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
 If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the working around the washer solution.
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
engine to cool down before loosening the filler markings on the dipstick.
cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminum
caps (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!
(Continued)
After the engine has warmed, operate the

WARNING!
PRESSURE WASHING
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the  Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
cold windshield. Mopar® All Weather Windshield ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash pressure washer is not recommended.
Washer Solution or equivalent, used with water as hands after handling.
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, CAUTION!
reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
and is not harmful to paint or trim. CAUTION! parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY  It is essential when replacing the cables on
complete protection against water ingress
the battery that the positive cable is attached
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free to the positive post and the negative cable is cannot be guaranteed.
battery. You will never have to add water, and attached to the negative post. Battery posts
periodic maintenance is not required. are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
WARNING! clamps should be tight on the terminal posts An authorized dealer has the qualified service
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and and free of corrosion. personnel, special tools, and equipment to
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow perform all service operations in an expert
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or manner. Service Manuals are available which
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when include detailed service information for your
cables before connecting the charger to the
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
on skin, flush the area immediately with large attempting any procedure yourself.
starting voltage.
amounts of water Ú page 192. NOTE:
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep Intentional tampering with emissions control
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use systems may void your warranty and could result in
a booster battery or any other booster source with civil penalties being assessed against you.
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
WARNING! CAUTION! ENGINE OIL FILTER

You can be badly injured working on or around a Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which the chemicals can damage your engine. Such filter at every engine oil change.
you have the knowledge and the proper damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Engine Oil Filter Selection
equipment. If you have any doubt about your Limited Warranty. A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
to a competent mechanic. varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
Synthetic Engine Oils
certified filters should be used.
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
ENGINE OIL only use synthetic API approved engine oils. ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER
Engine Oil Selection Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 199.
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids NOTE:
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Ú page 251. Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
American Petroleum Institute (API) Materials Added To Engine Oil maintenance interval if applicable.
Approved Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak WARNING!
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
engineered product and its performance may be etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
trademark oils. impaired by supplemental additives.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the 8
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils. unless such removal is necessary for repair or
Filters
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil engine compartment before starting the vehicle
and 5W-40 engine oil. and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
problem to the environment. Contact an authorized serious personal injury.
dealer, service station or governmental agency for
advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can
be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet in
CAUTION! the engine compartment. Perform the following
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning procedure to replace the filter:
filters should be used. system as the chemicals can damage your air 1. Remove the two screws that secure the filter
conditioning components. Such damage is not retainer to the fresh air inlet, and remove the
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. filter retainer.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
service should include cleaning of the condenser
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product.
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
However, the manufacturer recommends that air
should also be checked at this time.
conditioning service be performed by authorized
dealer or other service facilities using recovery and
WARNING!
recycling equipment.
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- NOTE:
cants approved by the manufacturer for your air Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
conditioning system. Some unapproved refrig- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. Accessing Air Filter
erants are flammable and can explode, injuring
you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri- Cabin Air Filter 1 — Screw Locations
cants can cause the system to fail, requiring Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this chapter for 2 — Fresh Air Inlet
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 199.
Book, for further warranty information.
WARNING! 2. Remove and replace the cabin air filter from
 The air conditioning system contains refrig- the filter retainer.
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
personal injury or damage to the system, vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines ACC or ON/RUN position. With the cabin air filter
to be disconnected should be done by an removed and the blower operating, the blower
experienced technician. can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
BODY LUBRICATION WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES

Locks and all body pivot points, including such Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with accumulations of salt or road film.
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
Removing Air Filter after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
removed. Particular attention should also be given from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
to hood latching components to ensure proper contact with petroleum products such as engine
2 — Cabin Air Filter oil, gasoline, etc.
function. When performing other underhood
3 — Cabin Air Filter Retainer
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and NOTE:
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
3. Install the cabin air filter/filter retainer back The external lock cylinders should be lubricated on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
into the fresh air inlet. When installing the filter twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
retainer make sure the retainer is fully Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
engaged. such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
4. Install the two screws back into the assembly to into the lock cylinder.
8
secure the filter retainer to the fresh air inlet.
EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION!

NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry  The catalytic converter requires the use of systems can result in civil penalties being
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will assessed against you.
engine exhaust system. destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an In unusual situations involving grossly
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust emissions control device and may seriously malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected reduce engine performance and cause may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear serious damage to the engine. overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
technician inspect the complete exhaust system tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, be obtained immediately.
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
particularly involving engine misfire or other To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to
apparent loss of performance, have your damage:
seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
have the exhaust system inspected each time the
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
could cause the converter to overheat,
Replace as required.  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle. towing the vehicle.
WARNING!
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain nents disconnected or removed, such as when
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
and can eventually poison you Ú page 175. ating conditions.
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you possible catalyst damage.
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those materials that
come into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
COOLING SYSTEM Coolant Checks NOTE:

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
WARNING! every 12 months (before the onset of freezing specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is engine coolant, may result in engine damage
 You or others can be badly burned by hot and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your engine coolant is different and should not be
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
MS-12106) only by an authorized dealer. Check the
under the hood, do not open the hood until the (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
cooling system pressure cap when the radi- introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of
ator or coolant bottle is hot. gency, the cooling system will need to be
the condenser.
 Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may NOTE: rized dealer as soon as possible.
start at any time, whether the engine is Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
running or not. properly. Failure to fill these systems properly coolant products. Do not use additional rust
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
coolant is needed to be added to the system be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
disconnect the fan motor lead and turn the
please contact an authorized dealer. and may plug the radiator.
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or  This vehicle has not been designed for use with
ignition is in the ON mode. contains visible sediment, have an authorized propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of 8
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
(conforming to MS.90032). recommended.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 199.  Some vehicles require special tools to add
Selection Of Coolant coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
For further information Ú page 251. properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant will reduce the amount of corrosion protection

in the engine cooling system. WARNING!
The vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) NOTE:  Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
that allows extended maintenance intervals. engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
proper level of protection against freezing
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
according to the temperatures occurring in the
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
area where the vehicle is operated.
maintenance period, it is important that you use scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
 Some vehicles require special tools to add while the system is hot or under pressure.
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
properly could lead to severe internal engine
Please review these recommendations for using damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of the system, please contact an authorized dealer. engine damage may result.
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
When adding engine coolant: Disposal Of Used Coolant
mended and can result in cooling system
 We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to with your local authorities to determine the disposal
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. MS.90032) as soon as possible. rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
 Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine Cooling System Pressure Cap animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant that meets the requirements of the coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
ground spills immediately.
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact coolant recovery tank.
an authorized dealer for assistance. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or
sealing surfaces.
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
Coolant Level  If frequent engine coolant additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure WARNING!
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
tested for leaks. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With engine off and cold, the  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to or riding on the brake pedal can result in
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks. MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro- abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
sion protection of your engine which contains lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
Cooling System Notes aluminum components. would not have your full braking capacity in an
NOTE: emergency.
 Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo- overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
meters of operation, you may observe vapor coming Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
from the front of the engine compartment. This is  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being the front of the condenser clean. checked when performing under the hood service
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces- indicates system failure. If necessary, add fluid to
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. bring level within the designated marks on the side
If an examination of your engine compartment
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage, sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
and increased emissions. before removing cap. With disc brakes the fluid
dissipate.
level can be expected to fall as the brake linings
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. BRAKE SYSTEM wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level 8
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator may be caused by a leak and a system check
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine should be conducted Ú page 251.
brake system components should be inspected
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the periodically Ú page 199.
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
WARNING! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The only exception to this policy is the use of
special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 9-speed
 Use only the manufacturer recommended Selection Of Lubricant transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
brake fluid Ú page 251. Using the wrong It is important to use the proper transmission fluid they may adversely affect seals.
type of brake fluid can severely damage your to ensure optimum transmission performance and
brake system and/or impair its performance. life. Use the manufacturer specified transmission CAUTION!
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle fluid Ú page 252. It is important to maintain the Do not use chemical flushes in your
is also identified on the original factory transmission fluid at the correct level using the transmission as the chemicals can damage your
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. recommended fluid. transmission components. Such damage is not
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or NOTE: covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep mission; only the approved lubricant should be used. Fluid Level Check
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container CAUTION! The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a not require adjustment under normal operating
Using a transmission fluid other than the conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged required, therefore the transmission filler tube is
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or capped and no dipstick is provided. An authorized
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. torque converter shudder Ú page 252.
This could result in a collision. dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
Special Additives
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, authorized dealer immediately to have the
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake The manufacturer strongly recommends against
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl using any special additives in the transmission.
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
severe transmission damage.
contact with these surfaces. engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
 Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami- do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
CAUTION! WARNING!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
authorized dealer immediately. Severe ignition is off and that all the other services
transmission damage may occur. An authorized are switched off and/or disengaged.
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
level accurately.
authorized dealer.
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
Fluid And Filter Changes bag system, braking system), power unit systems,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid Blade Fuses (engine system, transmission system) steering
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory system or Body Control Module (BCM) blows,
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. 1 — Fuse Element contact an authorized dealer.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid element
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse CAUTION!
transmission is disassembled for any reason. element (blown fuse) If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment,
FUSES take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the
windshield wiper motors with water.
General Information WARNING!
The fuses protect electrical systems against  When replacing a blown fuse, always use an 8
excessive current. appropriate replacement fuse with the same
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
extended periods of time with the engine off may a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
result in vehicle battery discharge. use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. To access the fuses, remove the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center

Removal of the two cover screws is necessary The ID number of the electrical component
before accessing the fuses. corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
Fuse Access Cover Screw Location
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 50 Amp Red – Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
20 Amp Yellow
F02 – Starter Relay
(3.6 Gasoline Engine) 8
F03 30 Amp Green – VSIM *
50 Amp Red Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC) / Trans Power ECU /
F04 –
(3.6 Gasoline Engine) Vacuum Pump / KL30 for the Shifter Transmission Module [STM]
50 Amp Red
F05 – EPB Valves & MOC
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
40 Amp Orange (non A/C)
F06 – Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
F07 50 Amp Red – Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F08 40 Amp Orange – Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 – – Spare
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 ECM/ KL15 Starter Relay Coil
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM) / Injectors
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM) / KL30 Main Relay Coil
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor *
F20 – 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM) / Ignition Coils
F23 – 30 Amp Green TT MOD
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum Pump Relay Coil
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Front PDC Additional Fuses

The additional fuse box is located inside the front
PDC Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
Cavity Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F61 30 Amp Green Vacuum Pump
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE
F65 15 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Mod
F66 15 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Mod
F68 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM) 8
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side
under the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Please contact an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
Fuse Panel Fuse Panel Cavity Locations

F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F33 7.5 Amp Brown +30 TTM
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM / USB Power Out / USB Recharge / TBM / RRM / DLC)
F37 7.5 Amp Brown INT (IPC – DASM / AEB)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM / BRAKE NC) / EPS
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (RRM / TTM / SBDU / XAN / JHC / RFX)
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)

INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX) / HALF / DRVM/ PAM / CVPM / EMC / TCM / STM /
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
ASS / HCPM / SGW
F53 5 Amp Beige +30 (IPC) + Keyless – GO / Passive Entry / Brake NO / EPB SW
Right Central Pillar Fuses

The right central pillar fuse panel is located on the
interior side at the base of the passenger side
B-pillar.
Fuse Panel
8
Fuse Panel Location

* If Equipped
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F82 30 Amp Green Inverter Power Outlet
F83 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater

* If Equipped
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
F86 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Battery) *
F87 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Ignition) *
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Dome Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Cargo Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp H7SLL
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7444NA
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) 7440
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps 7443
Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Fog Lamps H11
License Plate Lamps C5W
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer.
8
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 14. Install one upper retaining screw on the 8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
headlamp housing. position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
HEADLAMPS LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM 15. Install two lower retaining screws on the headlamp aiming.
See the following steps to replace: headlamp housing. 9. Install the one upper retaining screw on
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower 16. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler headlamp housing.
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel. panel and one retaining screw. 10. Install the two lower retaining screws on
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper 17. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler headlamp housing.
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel. panel and two retaining screws. 11. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the panel and one retaining screw.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMPS 12. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the See the following steps to replace: panel and two retaining screws.
headlamp housing. 1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP (DRL)/FRONT SIDE
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect harness MARKER LAMP
electrical connector and remove the headlamp 2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
assembly from vehicle. headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel. See the following steps to replace:
6. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the back 3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the 1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
of the headlamp housing. headlamp housing. headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
7. Push down on the upper portion of the socket. 4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the 2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp housing. headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
8. Pull the socket outward from reflector.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the 3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
9. Pull bulb outward from socket. headlamp housing.
harness electrical connector and remove the
10. Install new bulb. headlamp assembly from vehicle. 4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the
11. Push socket back into reflector until it locks 6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove. headlamp housing.
back into place. 5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
12. Install access cap. socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place. harness electrical connector and remove the
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same headlamp assembly from vehicle.
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
6. Remove the (DRL), side marker bulb by pulling FRONT, REAR ROOF LAMPS
straight out.
See the following steps to replace:
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp
8. Reinstall plastic cap. assembly.
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same 2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counter-
position on the vehicle, as not to affect clockwise.
headlamp aiming.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
10. Install the one upper retaining screw on the
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise
headlamp housing.
to lock in place.
11. Install the two lower retaining screws on the Rear Access Cover
5. Reinstall lamp.
headlamp housing. 3. Remove the two (2) 17 mm tail lamp assembly
12. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler REAR TAIL, STOP, BACKUP, TURN SIGNAL AND fasteners.
panel and one retaining screw. REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS 4. Disconnect the tail lamp harness connector
13. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler See the following steps to replace: and remove tail light assembly from the
panel and two retaining screws. vehicle.
1. Open rear doors.
5. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup and
FRONT FOG LAMPS 2. Remove the seven (7) fasteners from the rear
rear side marker bulb/socket by rotating
access cover and remove cover to gain access
See the following steps to replace: counterclockwise.
to the tail lamp assembly fasteners.
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in 6. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 8
wheel liner. 7. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise to
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel liner. lock in place.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb. 8. Reinstall lamp.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on
the wheel liner.
Replacing Interior Bulbs

CARGO LAMP
1. Using a suitable tool, remove either the lamp
above the back door or the sliding door lamp
as needed and disconnect it.
Cargo Lamp Bulb Location Dome Lamp Assembly Location

3. Remove and install the replacement bulb. 1 — Spring Tension Relief Access
4. Close the bulb access, connect the lamp and 2 — Dome Lamp Assembly
install the lamp into place.
2. Using a suitable tool, flex the housing to lift the
DOME LAMPS light pod cover away from the unit.
Rear Cargo Lamp Bulb Access 1. Using a suitable tool, insert the tip at the
location shown and press inward to the lamp
2. Using a suitable tool, pull open the metal bulb
to relieve the spring tension. This will allow
access on the back of the housing.
you to easily drop the dome lamp assembly
from its bracket and disconnect the lamp.
Dome Lamp Light Pod Cover

3. Remove and replace the bulbs as needed. Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Dome Lamp Light Bulbs  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
4. Close the housing cover making sure it snaps LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
together properly and connect the lamp.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
5. Install overhead console into place making 2 — Size Designation the sidewall preceding the size designation.
sure to seat the assembly’s forward end first 3 — Service Description Example: LT235/85R16.
and then snapping it flush so that the tension 4 — Maximum Load  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
spring is fully seating in the housing. rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
5 — Maximum Pressure sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or 8
TIRES 6 — Treadwear, Traction and “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
Temperature Grades designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the standards and it begins with the tire diameter
following information: Tire Markings, Tire molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and R15 LT.
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturers recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the:
NOTE: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on vehicle.
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
driver's side door. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
and spare tires.
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Loading
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
Tire And Loading Information Placard the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard Ú page 109.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 109.
Tire And Loading Information Placard

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. the amount of available cargo and luggage load
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never will be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
exceed the weight referenced here. vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
Steps For Determining Correct Load  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Limit— (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
weight of occupants and cargo should luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
vehicle's placard. pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(2) Determine the combined weight of and may not be accurate for the seating and
the driver and passengers that will be (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
riding in your vehicle. load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the determine how this reduces the 865 lb (392 kg).
driver and passengers from XXX kg or available cargo and luggage load
XXX lbs. 8
capacity of your vehicle.

Fuel Economy
WARNING! WARNING!
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.  Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
Tread Wear
handling, and increase your stopping distance. can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
your vehicle. Never overload them.
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
Tire Pressure problems. You could lose control of your
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
vehicle.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the uncomfortable ride.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
Tire Inflation Pressures
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
pressure: drift to the right or left. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
 Safety  Always drive with each tire inflated to the side door.
 Fuel Economy recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
At least once a month:
 Tread Wear  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
 Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
make a visual judgment when determining 8
Safety sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering. proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
WARNING! even when they are under-inflated.
NOTE:
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may damage.
can cause collisions. cause erratic and unpredictable steering
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can response.
result in overheating and tire failure.  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
(Continued) cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi Radial Ply Tires

CAUTION! (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure WARNING!
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will will be too low.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle combine them with other types of tires.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased Tire Repair
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure it meets the following criteria:
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
molded into the tire sidewall. speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.  The damage is only on the tread section of your
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire WARNING!
 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
pressures vary with temperature changes. High speed driving with your vehicle under (6 mm).
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi maximum load is dangerous. The added strain Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could and additional information.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then size and service description (Load Index and
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for as well as it is not designed to be reused.
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
WARNING! tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
generated by excessive wheel speeds may When the tread is worn to the tread wear
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could indicators, the tire should be replaced.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is explode and injure someone. Do not spin your Life Of Tire
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving factors including, but not limited to:
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.  Driving style.
is changed after driving with under-inflated tire  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
not designed to be reused when driven under run develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
tires to help you in determining when your tires the need for earlier tire replacement.
NOTE: should be replaced.
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the  Distance driven.
vehicle on a flat tire condition.  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
run flat mode. the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended. 8
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
for more information.
WARNING!
Tire Spinning
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds Tire Tread tire failure. You could lose control and have a
continuously without stopping. collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1 — Worn Tire
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” for further
2 — New Tire
information Ú page 196.
NOTE: It is recommended you contact an authorized tire

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when dealer or original equipment dealer with any CAUTION!
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing questions you may have on tire specifications or Replacing original tires with tires of a different
tires. capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement size may result in false speedometer and
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and odometer readings.
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires ride of your vehicle.
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING! TIRE TYPES
Replacement Tires
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed All Season Tires — If Equipped
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
Some combinations of unapproved tires and (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. wheels may change suspension dimensions and
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use levels may vary between different all season tires.
performance characteristics, resulting in changes All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. to steering and suspension components. You
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the may adversely affect the safety and handling of
could lose control and have a collision resulting in your vehicle.
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires —
will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. If Equipped
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Safety Information section of this manual for more capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
information relating to the Load Index and Speed on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
Symbol of a tire Ú page 226. index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision. aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever adequate speed capability can result in or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. information, contact an authorized dealer.
specifications match those of the original wheels.
Summer tires do not contain the all season (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the authorized tire dealer for recommended safe And Wheel — If Equipped
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and pressures. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
handling of your vehicle. wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
WARNING! poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury checked before using these tire types. recommended tire rotation pattern.
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
Snow Tires
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in The compact spare is for temporary emergency
Some areas of the country require the use of snow “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire CAUTION! spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
sidewall. Information Placard located on the driver’s side
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent take your vehicle through an automatic car wash door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
in size and type to the original equipment with a compact or limited use temporary spare Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. 8
failure to do so may adversely affect the Example: T145/80D18 103M.
safety and handling of your vehicle. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
designated for temporary emergency use
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
Ú page 114.
should not be operated at sustained speeds over and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is NOTE:
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the This spare tire may not have a TPMS sensor.
since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one lowering the vehicle.
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any The limited use spare tire is for temporary
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
given time. conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, label located on the limited use spare wheel.
since the wheel is designed specifically for the This label contains the driving limitations for this
WARNING! collapsible spare tire. spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive WARNING! not. Installation of this limited use spare tire
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the at the first opportunity.
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, WARNING!
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is Full Size Spare — If Equipped than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
Information Placard located on the driver’s side located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
original equipment tire at the first opportunity and
Collapsible spare tire description example: to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
165/80-17 101P. spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
result in loss of vehicle control.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. the first opportunity.
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE CAUTION!

NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Avoid products or automatic car washes that use extended period after cleaning the wheels with
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel brakes to remove the water droplets from the
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the cleaners and automatic car washes may brake components. This activity will remove the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the damage the wheel's protective finish. Such red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vehicle and remember to always wash when the damage is not covered by the New Vehicle vibration when braking.
surfaces are not hot to the touch. Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including CAUTION!
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome this finish and such damage is not covered by the
protective coating that helps keep them from Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
corroding and tarnishing. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
aluminum or chrome wheels. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
CAUTION! 8
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance the following traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
 Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.
 Please see the following table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Axle Tire/Wheel Size Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Trim Level
LT225/75R16E Quality Chain Corp Light Truck Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire chain or equivalent is
All Front
225/75R16C recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper

CAUTION! CAUTION! maintenance intervals Ú page 199. The reasons
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
the following precautions: instructions on the method of installation, prior to rotation being performed.
operating speed, and conditions for use. The suggested rotation method is the “forward
 Because of restricted traction device clearance
Always use the suggested operating speed of cross” shown in the following diagram. This
between tires and other suspension components,
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
it is important that only traction devices in good
30 mph (48 km/h). tires that must not be reversed.
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if  Do not use traction devices on a compact
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. spare tire.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
 Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
Autosock traction devices do not require operate at different loads and perform different
retightening. steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to 8
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and
pavement.
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
(Continued)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 100. The relative performance of tires TEMPERATURE G RADES

depends upon the actual conditions of
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES their use, however, and may depart The Temperature grades are A (the
significantly from the norm due to highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
The following tire grading categories
variations in driving habits, service resistance to the generation of heat
were established by the National
practices, and differences in road and its ability to dissipate heat, when
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
characteristics and climate. tested under controlled conditions on a
The specific grade rating assigned by the
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
tire's manufacturer in each category is TRACTION G RADES
shown on the sidewall of the tires on Sustained high temperature can cause
your vehicle. The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, the material of the tire to degenerate
are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent and reduce tire life, and excessive
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as temperature can lead to sudden tire
to Federal safety requirements in
measured under controlled conditions on failure. The grade C corresponds to
addition to these grades.
specified government test surfaces of a level of performance, which all
TREADWEAR asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may passenger vehicle tires must meet
The Treadwear grade is a comparative have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
WARNING! represent higher levels of performance
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on the laboratory test wheel, than the
For example, a tire graded 150 would
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and minimum required by law.
does not include acceleration, cornering,
wear one and one-half times as well on hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
the government course as a tire graded
WARNING! BODYWORK  Insects, tree sap and tar

 Salt in the air near seacoast localities
The temperature grade for this tire is PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, AGENTS BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE
or excessive loading, either separately or in Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
combination, can cause heat buildup and geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make Cleaning Headlights
possible tire failure. roads passable in snow and ice and those that are Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your to stone breakage than glass headlights.
STORING THE VEHICLE vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3 weeks, airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
we recommend that you take the following steps to vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather, and be followed.
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery: other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
 Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
The following maintenance recommendations will cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
 Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the solution followed by rinsing.
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
run the air conditioning system at idle for about Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower What Causes Corrosion? solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
setting prior to storing. This will ensure clean the lenses.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal 8
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again. The most common causes are:
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
 Stone and gravel impact
PRESERVING T HE B ODYWORK Special Care INTERIORS

 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
Washing SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your at least once a month.
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower and carpeting.
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
completely with water.
kept clear and open. WARNING!
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
paint, touch them up immediately. purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or and if used in closed areas they may cause
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- respiratory harm.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
as possible.
scratch the paint. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power If Equipped
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
materials are well packaged and sealed.
the paint finish. manner:
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each  Remove as much of the stain as possible by
CAUTION!
wheel. blotting with a clean, dry towel.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
 Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as  Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has towel.
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
touch up paint to match the color of your
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi vehicle.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
 For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth WARNING!
Lenses
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
remove soap residue. The lenses in front of the instruments in this
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
 For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the plastic.
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
residue. belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
 Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
of protectants on Stain Repel products. with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified
Seat Belt Maintenance Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
LEATHER SURFACES
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS for leather upholstery.
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
CAUTION! particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- the leather upholstery and should be removed
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly. plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total 8
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
away immediately. leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
 Damage caused by these type of products detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
may not be covered by your New Vehicle your leather upholstery.
Limited Warranty.
NOTE: GLASS SURFACES Cleaning

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any follow the cleaning procedure below.
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. cleaning the inside rear window equipped with Let soak for approximately 30 minutes. After
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio 30 minutes, pull the liner from the water and dip it
CAUTION! antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp back into the water about six times. This will loosen
instruments that may scratch the elements. any remaining debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or under warm running water. Shake the excess
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may a clean soft cloth.
result. spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Installation
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT P ANEL
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push
C UPHOLDERS the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat
Removal into the corresponding openings in the drawer.
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer
starting at one edge to ease removal.
247
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
normal capability, the remaining system will still vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
function. However, there will be some loss of reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice should be torqued using a properly calibrated
increased pedal travel during application, greater torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential socket.
activation of the Brake System Warning Light.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
the brakes will still function. However, the effort Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
145 Ft-Lb
than that required with the power system M16 x 1.50 21 mm
Vehicle Identification Number (197 N·m)
operating.
NOTE:
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
9
248 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
loose particles. While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Torque Patterns
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are experience these symptoms, try another brand of
Wheel Mounting Surface properly seated against the wheel. gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until WARNING! 3.6L E NGINE
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the This engine is designed to meet all
(do not insert it halfway). jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until emission regulations and provide
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow optimum fuel economy and performance
this warning may result in personal injury. when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 249
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel Problems that result from using gasoline containing
system cleaning agents should more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
Many areas of the country require the use be avoided. Many of these methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
of cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as materials intended for gum and and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline varnish removal may contain Limited Warranty.
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to active solvents or similar
reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. ingredients. These can harm DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. VEHICLES
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
engine and fuel system components. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may
oxygenates such as ethanol.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, symptoms:
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
recommended. Using gasolines that have these  Operate in a lean mode.
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce and drivability problems, damage critical fuel  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. system components, cause emissions to exceed  Poor engine performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline the applicable standard, and/or cause the
 Poor cold start and cold drivability.
contains a higher level of detergents to Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
further aide in minimizing engine and observe pump labels as they should clearly  Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
fuel system deposits. When available, communicate if a fuel contains greater than
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline retailers.
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION!

MODIFICATIONS  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
CAUTION!
Modifications that allow the engine to run on sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane Follow these guidelines to maintain your mended. Most of these products contain high
(LP) may result in damage to the engine, vehicle’s performance: concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by damage or vehicle performance problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or engine performance and damage the emis- tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited sions control system. turer and may void or not be covered under
Warranty. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
MMT I N GASOLINE malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent NOTE:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl Intentional tampering with the emissions control
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive system can result in civil penalties being assessed
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
that is blended into some gasoline to increase against you.
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
rized dealer for service assistance.
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline (Continued)
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 251
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24 Gallons 90 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
Engine Coolant
(Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the
Engine Oil manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have
the API Starburst trademark Ú page 205.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters that
Engine Oil Filter 9
meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
Automatic Transmission
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4. DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
253
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  Authorized dealer name
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
 Vehicle delivery date and mileage
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services. FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the P.O. Box 21–8004
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt Phone: (866) 726-4636
clue to the current problem. and high quality service. FCA US LLC's authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST special tools, and the latest information to ensure the
P.O. Box 1621
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
the specific work you want done. If you've had This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
an accident or work done that is not on your
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or French
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
MEXICO
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
If you list a number of items and you must have
Customer Assistance center. Sante Fe C.P. 05109
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer Mexico, D.F.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you center should include the following information:
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges  Owner's name and address
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
make these arrangements when you call for an
office)
appointment.
254 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS SERVICE CONTRACT WARNING!

FCA Caribbean LLC You may have purchased a service contract for a Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
P.O. Box 191857 vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of only), some of its constituents, and certain
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
San Juan 00919-1857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle known to the State of California to cause cancer
Phone: (866) 726-4636 Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
Fax: (787) 782-3345 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection and certain products of component wear
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in or other reproductive harm.
(TDD/TTY) the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, date. If you have any questions about the service
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu- contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract WARRANTY INFORMATION
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English/ See the Warranty Information for the terms and
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
(800) 387-9983 French). provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service for further information.
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by contract you may have purchased from another
dialing 1-800-380-2479. manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA See the Warranty Information for the terms
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
please refer to the contract documents, and applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
require assistance can use the special needs relay
contact the person listed in those documents. www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter
users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial We appreciate that you have made a major For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service investment when you purchased the vehicle. further information.
operator. An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 255
Use this QR code to access your

digital experience.
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
cannot become involved in individual
To order the following manuals, you may use either
problems between you, an authorized the website or the phone numbers listed below.
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
Service Manuals
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
MOPAR® PARTS Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// system, and/or components and is written in
Mopar® original equipment parts and accessories
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, straightforward language with illustrations,
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West diagrams, and charts.
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
its original condition. also obtain other information about motor Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS I N C ANADA
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND If you believe that your vehicle has a safety They show exactly how to find and correct
WASHINGTON, D.C. problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
defect, you should contact the Customer drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
If you believe that your vehicle has a Service Department immediately. Canadian a complete list of all tools and equipment.
defect that could cause a crash or cause customers who wish to report a safety To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
injury or death, you should immediately defect to the Canadian government should Procedure manuals, visit:
inform the National Highway Traffic contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in Defect Investigations and Recalls at
addition to notifying FCA US LLC. 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP. 10
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
256 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Owner's Manuals The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this This equipment complies with radiation exposure
with the assistance of service and engineering vehicle: limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA CANADA This equipment should be installed and operated
vehicles. with minimum distance of 20 cm between the
Canada 310 radiator and the body of any persons, user or
To access your Owner's Information online, These devices comply with Industry Canada's bystander.
visit www.mopar.com/om (US) or RSS - 310. Operation is subject to the condition
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not
that this device must not cause harmful expressly approved by the party responsible for
Or interference and must accept any interference, compliance could void the user's authority to
including interference that may cause undesired operate the equipment.
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
operation of the device .
 1-800-890-4038 (US) MEXICO
Cet appareil est conforme au RSS - 310 d 'Industrie
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis à la condition La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Information Books can be ordered through que cet appareil ne provoque pas d'interférences siguientes dos condiciones:
Archway at: nuisibles et accepte toute interférence, y compris 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un cause interferencia perjudicial y
fonctionnement indésirable de l'appareil 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
GENERAL INFORMATION US cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
The following regulatory statement applies to These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC pueda causar su operación no deseada.
UConnect devices equipped in this vehicle: Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
MRR certification no. IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0598
FCC ID: Y7OVP2REFRESH conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any
IC: 7812H-VP2REFRESH interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
257
INDEX
A Air Filter ........................................................ 205 Fluid Type ........................................ 212, 252
Active Driving Assist ......................................... 92 Air Pressure Special Additives ...................................... 212
Active Speed Limiter ........................................ 79 Tires ......................................................... 233 AUX Cord ..........................................................44
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Alarm Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 142
(Cruise Control) ................................................ 80 Security Alarm ...................................... 20, 61
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............210 Alarm System B
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................203 Security Alarm .............................................20 Battery ................................................... 60, 204
Additives, Fuel ...............................................249 Alterations/Modifications Charging System Light .................................60
Air Bag ...........................................................162 Vehicle........................................................... 8 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................14
Air Bag Operation ......................................162 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 209, 251 Belts, Seat .................................................... 173
Air Bag Warning Light ................................161 Disposal ................................................... 210 Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 142
Enhanced Accident Response ...................197 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 137 Body Builders Guide........................................... 8
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................197 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................61 Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 207
If Deployment Occurs ................................165 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 140 B-Pillar Location ............................................ 230
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............167 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 119 Brake Assist System ..................................... 138
Maintenance .............................................167 Auto Down Power Windows .............................48 Brake Control System, Electronic .................. 138
Side Air Bags .............................................163 Auto Up Power Windows ..................................48 Brake Fluid ........................................... 211, 252
Transporting Pets ......................................173 Automatic Door Locks ......................................22 Brake System ....................................... 211, 247
Air Bag Light ..................................59, 161, 173 Automatic Headlights.......................................33 Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 137
Air Cleaner, Engine Automatic High Beams ....................................33 Fluid Check ............................................... 211
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ..............................205 Automatic Transmission .........................73, 213 Master Cylinder ........................................ 211
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................206 Adding Fluid ..................................... 212, 213 Parking ........................................................71
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................206 Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 213 Warning Light...............................................59
Air Conditioner System ..................................206 Fluid Change ............................................ 213 Brake/Transmission Interlock ..........................74
Air Conditioning Filter .............................43, 206 Fluid Level Check ..................................... 212 Bulb Replacement ........................................ 220 11
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips................ 42, 43 Bulbs, Light .......................................... 174, 220
258
C Climate Control ................................................39 Dimmer Control Switch ....................................36

Camera, Rear ...................................... 105, 106 Manual ........................................................39 Dimmer Switch
Capacities, Fluid ............................................251 Rear.............................................................42 Headlight .....................................................33
Caps, Filler Cold Weather Operation ..................................69 Dipsticks
Fuel ...........................................................108 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 237 Automatic Transmission ........................... 212
Oil (Engine) ................................................202 Contract, Service .......................................... 254 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 203
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................210 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 210 Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 196
Car Washes ...................................................244 Cooling System ............................................. 209 Disposal
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................175 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 210 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 210
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 50 Coolant Level ................................... 209, 211 Door Ajar ..........................................................60
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 50 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 251 Door Ajar Light .................................................60
Cargo Light ...................................................... 35 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 210 Door Locks .......................................................20
Cellular Phone ...............................................136 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 209 Automatic ....................................................22
Certification Label .........................................109 Inspection................................................. 211 Doors ...............................................................20
Change Oil Indicator ........................................ 56 Points To Remember ................................ 211 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................23
Changing A Flat Tire .......................................180 Pressure Cap ............................................ 210 Driving
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................226 Radiator Cap ............................................ 210 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 209, 251 Standing Water .................................... 118
Indicator Light) ................................................ 68 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 243
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................172 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ........................80 E
Checks, Safety ...............................................172 Cruise Light ......................................................66 Electric Brake Control System ....................... 138
Child Restraint ...............................................168 Cupholders ................................................... 246 Electric Parking Brake ......................................71
Child Restraints Customer Assistance .................................... 253 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................31
Booster Seats............................................170 Customer Programmable Features ............... 120 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................45
Child Seat Installation ...............................172 Cybersecurity ................................................ 119 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........80
Infant And Child Restraints .......................169 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................... 138
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........169 D Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........60
Clean Air Gasoline .........................................249 Dealer Service .............................................. 204
Cleaning Defroster, Windshield ................................... 173
Wheels ......................................................239 Diagnostic System, Onboard ............................67
259
Emergency, In Case Of Exhaust System ................................... 175, 208 Ethanol ..................................................... 249
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................196 Exterior Lights .........................................32, 174 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 108
Jacking ......................................................180 Gasoline ................................................... 248
Jump Starting ............................................192 F Materials Added ....................................... 249
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 68 Filters Methanol .................................................. 249
Engine ...........................................................202 Air Cleaner ................................................ 205 Octane Rating .................................. 248, 251
Air Cleaner.................................................205 Air Conditioning ..................................43, 206 Requirements .................................. 248, 251
Block Heater ............................................... 70 Engine Oil ........................................ 205, 251 Tank Capacity ........................................... 251
Break-In Recommendations ........................ 70 Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 205 Fuses ............................................................ 213
Checking Oil Level .....................................203 Flashers
Compartment ............................................202 Hazard Warning ........................................ 176 G
Compartment Identification ......................202 Turn Signals ............................................. 174 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................... 108, 109
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................... 209, 251 Flat Tire Changing ................................ 225, 237 Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 249
Cooling ......................................................209 Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 225, 237 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 249
Exhaust Gas Caution .................................175 Flooded Engine Starting...................................70 Gauges
Fails To Start ............................................... 70 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 251 Fuel..............................................................62
Flooded, Starting ......................................... 70 Fluid Leaks ................................................... 174 Gear Ranges ....................................................75
Fuel Requirements .......................... 248, 251 Fluid Level Checks Gear Selector Override .................................. 195
Jump Starting ............................................192 Automatic Transmission ........................... 212 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 246
Oil .................................................... 205, 251 Brake ........................................................ 211 Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................... 109, 111
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................202 Cooling System ......................................... 209 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................ 109, 110
Oil Filter .....................................................205 Engine Oil ................................................. 203 Guide
Oil Selection .................................... 205, 251 Fog Lights ........................................................34 Body Builders................................................. 8
Oil Synthetic ..............................................205 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................23 GVWR ............................................................ 109
Overheating ...............................................194 Forward Collision Warning ............................ 148
Starting ....................................................... 69 Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 176 H
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........197 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 196 Hazard
Entry System, Illuminated ................................ 37 Fuel ............................................................... 248 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow 11
Ethanol ..........................................................249 Additives ................................................... 249 Standing Water .................................... 118
Exhaust Gas Cautions....................................175 Clean Air ................................................... 249 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 176
260
Head Restraints ............................................... 27 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 245 L

Headlights Intelligent Speed Assist ...................................79 Lane Change Assist..........................................34
Automatic .................................................... 33 Interior And Instrument Lights .........................35 LaneSense .................................................... 102
Cleaning ....................................................243 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 244 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 155
High Beam .................................................. 33 Interior Lights...................................................35 Latches ......................................................... 174
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 33 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................38 Hood ............................................................49
Passing........................................................ 33 Inverter Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 248
Switch ......................................................... 32 Power ..........................................................46 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 174
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 32 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................................44 Life Of Tires ................................................... 235
Heated Seats ................................................... 26 Light Bulbs ........................................... 174, 220
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 70 J Lights ............................................................ 174
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Jack Location ................................................ 180 Air Bag ...................................... 59, 161, 173
Switch .............................................................. 33 Jack Operation .............................................. 180 Brake Assist Warning................................ 140
Hill Start Assist ..............................................140 Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 180 Brake Warning .............................................59
Hitches Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ........ 180 Bulb Replacement .................................... 220
Trailer Towing ............................................112 Jump Starting ............................................... 192 Collision Warning ..................................63, 65
Hood Prop ........................................................ 49 Cruise ..........................................................66
Hood Release .................................................. 49 K Daytime Running .........................................32
Key Fob ............................................................13 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ....................32, 33
I Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............15 Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Ignition ............................................................ 16 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Indicator ................................. 60, 62, 140
Switch ......................................................... 16 Keyless Entry) ..................................................14 Exterior .............................................. 32, 174
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 37 Key Fob Programming (Remote Fuel Cutoff Failure .......................................65
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 16 Keyless Entry) ..................................................15 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 176
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................29, 176 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ .......................................21 Headlights ...................................................32
Instrument Cluster Passive Entry ...............................................21 High Beam ...................................................33
Descriptions ................................................ 54 Keys .................................................................13 Illuminated Entry .........................................37
Display ........................................................ 55 Replacement ...............................................15 Instrument Cluster .......................................62
Display Controls .......................................... 55 Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................16
Menu Items ................................................. 56
261
Interior ........................................................ 35 Mirrors .............................................................29 Disposal .................................................... 205

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......... 63 Electric Remote ...........................................31 Filter ................................................ 205, 251
Park...................................................... 33, 66 Exterior Folding............................................31 Filter Disposal ........................................... 205
Passing........................................................ 33 Heated.........................................................32 Identification Logo .................................... 205
Rear Cargo Door Open Warning Light.......... 61 Outside ........................................................30 Materials Added To................................... 205
Seat Belt Reminder ..................................... 61 Rearview.............................................29, 176 Pressure Warning Light................................61
Security Alarm ............................................. 61 Modifications/Alterations Recommendation ............................ 205, 251
Service ......................................................220 Vehicle........................................................... 8 Synthetic ................................................... 205
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............151 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 151 Viscosity .................................................... 251
Tow Haul ..................................................... 65 Mopar Parts .................................................. 255 Onboard Diagnostic System .............................67
TowingHookBreakdown ............................... 64 MP3 Control .....................................................44 Operating Precautions .....................................67
Traction Control .........................................140 Multi-Function Control Lever ............................32 Operator Manual
Turn Signals .......................................32, 174 Owner's Manual ........................................ 255
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions.... 60 N Outside Rearview Mirrors ..........................29, 30
Loading Vehicle ................................... 109, 110 New Vehicle Break-In Period ............................70 Overheating, Engine ...................................... 194
Capacities .................................................110
Tires ..........................................................230 O P
Locks Occupant Restraints ..................................... 154 Paint Care ..................................................... 243
Automatic Door .................................... 20, 22 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 248 Parking Brake ..................................................71
Low Tire Pressure System .............................151 Oil Change Indicator ........................................56 ParkSense
Lubrication, Body ...........................................207 Reset ...........................................................56 Front And Rear.............................................96
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................247 Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 205 ParkSense System, Rear ..................................96
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 205 Passing Light ....................................................33
M Oil Pressure Light .............................................61 Passive Entry....................................................21
Maintenance Free Battery .............................204 Oil, Engine ............................................ 205, 251 Personal Settings .............................................58
Maintenance Schedule..................................198 Capacity.................................................... 251 Pets ............................................................... 173
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..... 63 Checking................................................... 203 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 230
Manual Dipstick .................................................... 203 11
Service ......................................................255
Methanol .......................................................249
262
Power Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 220 Operating Instructions .............................. 157

Inverter........................................................ 46 Replacement Keys ...........................................15 Pregnant Women ...................................... 159
Mirrors......................................................... 31 Replacement Tires ........................................ 236 Rear Seat.................................................. 155
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 45 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 255 Reminder .................................................. 155
Steering....................................................... 78 Restraints, Child ........................................... 168 Untwisting Procedure................................ 158
Windows ...................................................... 48 Restraints, Head ..............................................27 Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 245
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................159 Rotation, Tires .............................................. 241 Seats ................................................................23
Preparation For Jacking .................................180 Adjustment ..................................................23
S Heated .........................................................26
R Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 173 Rear Folding ................................................23
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................234 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 174 Tilting ...........................................................23
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............210 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 255 Security Alarm ...........................................20, 61
Radio Safety Information, Tire ................................ 225 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 251
Sound Setting............................................132 Safety Tips .................................................... 172 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................16
Radio Operation ............................................136 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 175 Service Assistance ........................................ 253
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 38 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 198 Service Contract ............................................ 254
Rear Camera ....................................... 105, 106 Seat Belts ............................................ 154, 173 Service Manuals ........................................... 255
Rear Cross Path .............................................144 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 158 Settings
Rear ParkSense System .................................. 96 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 158 Personal ................................................... 120
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 29 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Shift Lever Override ...................................... 195
Recreational Towing ......................................116 Anchorage ............................................ 158 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 155
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................249 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 159 Signals, Turn ................................................. 174
Refrigerant ....................................................206 Child Restraints ........................................ 168 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 240
Release, Hood ................................................. 49 Energy Management Feature ................... 159 Snow Tires .................................................... 237
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................155 Front Seat............................... 154, 155, 157 Spare Tires ........................................... 237, 238
Remote Keyless Entry Inspection................................................. 173 Speed Limiter, Active .......................................79
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 15 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 157
Remote Starting Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 158
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 18 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 155
Remote Starting System .................................. 17
263
Starting ............................................................ 69 Chains ...................................................... 240 Recreational ............................................. 116

Automatic Transmission .............................. 69 Changing .................................................. 180 Weight ...................................................... 113
Button ......................................................... 16 Compact Spare......................................... 237 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 116
Cold Weather .............................................. 69 General Information ........................ 233, 237 Traction ......................................................... 117
Engine Fails To Start ................................... 70 High Speed ............................................... 234 Traction Control ............................................ 141
Steering ........................................................... 23 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 233 Traffic Sign Assist .............................................91
Column Lock ............................................... 23 Jacking ..................................................... 180 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 141
Power .......................................................... 78 Life Of Tires .............................................. 235 Trailer Towing ................................................ 110
Storage, Vehicle......................................42, 243 Load Capacity ........................................... 230 Hitches ..................................................... 112
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................243 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..63, 151 Minimum Requirements ........................... 113
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....162 Quality Grading ......................................... 242 Tips ........................................................... 115
Surround View Camera ..................................106 Radial ....................................................... 234 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 113
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................141 Replacement ............................................ 236 Wiring ....................................................... 115
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 9 Rotation.................................................... 241 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 113
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................................205 Safety .............................................. 225, 233 Trailer Weight ................................................ 113
Sizes ......................................................... 226 Transmission
T Snow Tires ................................................ 237 Automatic .......................................... 73, 212
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 23 Spare Tires ...................................... 237, 238 Fluid.......................................................... 252
Tip Start ........................................................... 69 Spinning ................................................... 235 Maintenance ............................................ 212
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........230 Trailer Towing ........................................... 114 Transmission Fault Warning Light ....................61
Tire Markings .................................................225 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 235 Transporting Pets .......................................... 173
Tire Safety Information ..................................225 Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 247 Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 235
Tire Service Kit .................. 187, 188, 189, 191 To Open Hood ..................................................49
Tires...................................174, 233, 237, 242 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 113
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................235 Towing ................................................. 110, 196
Air Pressure ...............................................233 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 196
Guide ........................................................ 113
11
264
U W Windshield Defroster .................................... 173

Uconnect Settings Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Windshield Washers .............................. 38, 203
Customer Programmable Features ....21, 120 Descriptions)....................................................62 Fluid.............................................................38
Passive Entry Programming......................... 21 Warning Lights And Messages .........................59 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 207
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................242 Warranty Information .................................... 254 Windshield Wipers ...........................................38
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................248 Washer Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 207
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................158 Adding Fluid .............................................. 203 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................38
USB ................................................................. 44 Washing Vehicle ........................................... 244 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................38
Water Wireless Charging Pad .....................................47
V Driving Through ........................................ 118
Vehicle Certification Label .............................109 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 239
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............247 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 239
Vehicle Loading .......................... 109, 110, 230 Wind Buffeting .................................................49
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 8 Window Fogging ...............................................43
Vehicle Storage ......................................42, 243 Windows ..........................................................48
Voice Command .............................................. 28 Power ..........................................................48
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 28
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 RAM PROMASTER
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
` `
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 PROMASTER

©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Second Edition
OWNER’S MANUAL
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_VF_OM_EN_USC

2022 Promaster: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Promaster: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Promaster: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM PROMASTER

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 PROMASTER

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................................51 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 69 4

5 MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................ 119 5

6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 137 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS ....................................................................20 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 32

Minimum Risk Maneuver.................................95 VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 109 MULTIMEDIA

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION................................254

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Red Warning Lights Brake Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Generic Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

TOW/HAUL Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Keyless System Failure Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Rain Sensor Failure Light Cruise Control Indicator Light

Exterior Lights Failure Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light

Automatic High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light

Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator Light

Speed Warning Indicator Light

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

 When opening the driver's door and the ignition

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 The park lights will turn on and remain on during

HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  Hood closed TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:  Unlock the load compartment doors only if the NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

STEERING WHEEL WARNING! MANUAL A DJUSTMENTS

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Forward And Rearward Adjustment Recliner Adjustment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

Damper Weight Adjustment

Lumbar Support — If Equipped

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

The fold-down tray is equipped with two cup HEAD R ESTRAINTS

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

GET S TARTED For Uconnect system support, call

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE